OGA INHIBITOR COMPOUNDS

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to O-GlcNAc hydrolase (OGA) inhibitors, having the structure shown in Formula

wherein the radicals are as defined in the specification. The invention is also directed to pharmaceutical compositions comprising such compounds, to processes for preparing such compounds and compositions, and to the use of such compounds and

compositions for the prevention and treatment of disorders in which inhibition of OGA is beneficial, such as tauopathies, in particular Alzheimer’s disease or progressive supranuclear palsy; and neurodegenerative diseases accompanied by a tau pathology, in particular amyotrophic lateral sclerosis or frontotemporal lobe dementia caused by C90RF72 mutations.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

O-GlcNAcylation is a reversible modification of proteins where N-acetyl-D- glucosamine residues are transferred to the hydroxyl groups of serine- and threonine residues yield O-GlcNAcylated proteins. More than 1000 of such target proteins have been identified both in the cytosol and nucleus of eukaryotes. The modification is thought to regulate a huge spectrum of cellular processes including transcription, cytoskeletal processes, cell cycle, proteasomal degradation, and receptor signalling. O-GlcNAc transferase (OGT) and O-GlcNAc hydrolase (OGA) are the only two proteins described that add (OGT) or remove (OGA) O-GlcNAc from target proteins. OGA was initially purified in 1994 from spleen preparation and 1998 identified as antigen expressed by meningiomas and termed MGEA5, consists of 916 amino

(102915 Dalton) as a monomer in the cytosolic compartment of cells. It is to be distinguished from ER- and Golgi-related glycosylation processes that are important for trafficking and secretion of proteins and different to OGA have an acidic pH optimum, whereas OGA display highest activity at neutral pH. The OGA catalytic domain with its double aspartate catalytic center resides in then- terminal part of the enzyme which is flanked by two flexible domains. The C-terminal part consists of a putative HAT (histone acetyl transferase domain) preceded by a stalk domain. It has yet still to be proven that the HAT-domain is catalytically active.

O-GlcNAcylated proteins as well as OGT and OGA themselves are particularly abundant in the brain and neurons suggesting this modification plays an important role in the central nervous system. Indeed, studies confirmed that O-GlcNAcylation represents a key regulatory mechanism contributing to neuronal communication, memory formation and neurodegenerative disease. Moreover, it has been shown that OGT is essential for embryogenesis in several animal models and ogt null mice are embryonic lethal. OGA is also indispensible for mammalian development. Two independent studies have shown that OGA homozygous null mice do not survive beyond 24-48 hours after birth. Oga deletion has led to defects in glycogen

mobilization in pups and it caused genomic instability linked cell cycle arrest in MEFs derived from homozygous knockout embryos. The heterozygous animals survived to adulthood however they exhibited alterations in both transcription and metabolism. It is known that perturbations in O-GlcNAc cycling impact chronic metabolic diseases such as diabetes, as well as cancer. Oga heterozygosity suppressed intestinal tumorigenesis in an Apc-/+ mouse cancer model and the Oga gene ( MGEA5 ) is a documented human diabetes susceptibility locus. In addition, O-GlcNAc-modifications have been identified on several proteins that are involved in the development and progression of neurodegenerative diseases and a correlation between variations of O-GlcNAc levels on the formation of neurofibrillary tangle (NFT) protein by Tau in Alzheimer’s disease has been suggested. In addition, O-GlcNAcylation of alpha-synuclein in Parkinson’s disease has been described.

In the central nervous system six splice variants of tau have been described. Tau is encoded on chromosome 17 and consists in its longest splice variant expressed in the central nervous system of 441 amino acids. These iso forms differ by two N-terminal inserts (exon 2 and 3) and exon 10 which lie within the microtubule binding domain. Exon 10 is of considerable interest in tauopathies as it harbours multiple mutations that render tau prone to aggregation as described below. Tau protein binds to and stabilizes the neuronal microtubule cytoskeleton which is important for regulation of the intracellular transport of organelles along the axonal compartments. Thus, tau plays an important role in the formation of axons and maintenance of their integrity. In addition, a role in the physiology of dendritic spines has been suggested as well. Tau aggregation is either one of the underlying causes for a variety of so called tauopathies like PSP (progressive supranuclear palsy), Down’s syndrome (DS), FTLD (frontotemporal lobe dementia), FTDP-17 (frontotemporal dementia with

Parkinsonism- 17), Pick’s disease (PD), CBD (corticobasal degeneration), agryophilic grain disease (AGD), and AD (Alzheimer’s disease). In addition, tau pathology accompanies additional neurodegenerative diseases like amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS) or FTLD cause by C90RF72 mutations. In these diseases, tau is post- translationally modified by excessive phosphorylation which is thought to detach tau from microtubules and makes it prone to aggregation. O-GlcNAcylation of tau regulates the extent of phosphorylation as serine or threonine residues carrying O- GlcNAc-residues are not amenable to phosphorylation. This effectively renders tau less prone to detaching from microtubules and reduces aggregation into neurotoxic tangles which ultimately lead to neurotoxicity and neuronal cell death. This mechanism may also reduce the cell-to-cell spreading of tau-aggregates released by neurons via along interconnected circuits in the brain which has recently been discussed to accelerate pathology in tau-related dementias. Indeed, hyperphosphorylated tau isolated from brains of AD-patients showed significantly reduced O-GlcNAcylation levels.

An OGA inhibitor administered to INPL3 tau transgenic mice successfully reduced NFT formation and neuronal loss without apparent adverse effects. This observation has been confirmed in another rodent model of tauopathy where the expression of mutant tau found in FTD can be induced (tg45l0). Dosing of a small molecule inhibitor of OGA was efficacious in reducing the formation of tau-aggregation and attenuated the cortical atrophy and ventricle enlargement. Moreover, the O-GlcNAcylation of the amyloid precursor protein (APP) favours processing via the non-amyloidogenic route to produce soluble APP fragment and avoid cleavage that results in the AD associated amyloid-beta (Ab) formation.

Maintaining O-GlcNAcylation of tau by inhibition of OGA represents a potential approach to decrease tau-phosphorylation and tau-aggregation in neurodegenerative diseases mentioned above thereby attenuating or stopping the progression of neurodegenerative tauopathy-diseases. W02008/012623 (Pfizer Prod. Inc., published 31 January 2008) discloses 2-[(4-phenyl- 1 -piperidyl)methyl] - 1 H-benzimidazo le and 2- [(3 -phenylpyrrolidin- 1 -yl)methyl] - 1 H- benzimidazole derivatives and as an exception, 2-(3-benzylpyrrolidin-l-yl)methyl]-lH- benzimidazole as mGluR2 potentiators.

W02007/115077 (AstraZeneca A.B. and NPS Pharma Inc., published 11 October 2007) discloses mainly 1 H-benzimidazo l-2-ylmethyl substituted 4-piperidines and

3-pyrrolidines, bearing at the 4- or 3-position respectively a phenylalkyl substituent, such as for example, 2-[3-(4-fluorobenzyl)-piperidin-l-ylmethyl]-l-methyl-lH- benzoimidazole, as mGluR potentiators.

WO03/092678 (Schering AG, published 13 November 2007) describes substituted imidazole derivatives as NOS inhibitors, and describes (3S)-3-(4-aminophenoxy)-l- [(l,3-benzodioxol-5-yl)methyl]piperidine as an intermediate of synthesis.

W093/21181 (Merck Sharp & Dohme, published 28 October 1993) discloses

Tachykinin antagonists. Particular example 6, 2-[{(2R*,3R*)-3-((3,5- bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)methyloxy)-2-phenylpiperidino}met hyl]benzimidazole, requires a phenyl substituent at the piperidine.

WO2012/117219 (Summit Corp. plc., published 7 September 2012) describes N-[[5- (hydroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl]methyl]alkylamide and N-alkyl-2-[5- (hydroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl] acetamide derivatives as OGA inhibitors.

WO2014/159234 (Merck Patent GMBH, published 2 October 2014) discloses mainly

4-phenyl or benzyl-piperidine and piperazine compounds substituted at the 1 -position with an acetamido-thiazolylmethyl or acetamidoxazolylmethyl substituent and the compound N-[5-[(3-phenyl- 1 -piperidyl)methyl]thiazol-2-yl]acetamide;

W02016/0300443 (Asceneuron S.A., published 3 March 2016), WO2017/144633 and

W02017/0114639 (Asceneuron S.A., published 31 August 2017) disclose 1,4- disubstituted piperidines or piperazines as OGA inhibitors;

WO2017/144637 (Asceneuron S.A, published 31 August 2017.) discloses more particular 4-substituted l-[l-(l,3-benzodioxol-5-yl)ethyl]-piperazine; l-[l-(2,3- dihydrobenzofuran-5-yl)ethyl]-; l-[l-(2,3-dihydrobenzofuran-6-yl)ethyl]-; and l-[l- (2, 3-dihydro- l,4-benzodioxin-6-yl)ethyl] -piperazine derivatives as OGA inhibitors; WO2017/106254 (Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp.) describes substituted N-[5-[(4- methylene-l-piperidyl)methyl]thiazol-2-yl]acetamide compounds as OGA inhibitors. There is still a need for OGA inhibitor compounds with an advantageous balance of properties, for example with improved potency, good bioavailability, pharmacokinetics, and brain penetration, and/or better toxicity profile. It is accordingly an object of the present invention to provide compounds that overcome at least some of these problems.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I)

and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein

R ^A is a heteroaryl radical selected from the group consisting of pyridin-2-yl, pyridin-3-yl, pyridin-4-yl, pyridazin-3-yl, pyrimidin-4-yl, pyrimidin-5-yl, and pyrazin- 2-yl; or is phenyl; each of which may be optionally substituted with 1, 2 or 3 substituents, in particular 2 substituents, each independently selected from the group consisting of halo; cyano; OH; Ci_ ₄ alkyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected halo substituents; C3-6cycloalkyl; -C(0)NR ^a R ^aa ; NR ^a R ^aa ; and Ci_ ₄ alkyloxy optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected halo substituents; wherein R ^a and R ^aa are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and Ci_ ₄ alkyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected halo substituents;

L ^A is selected from the group consisting of a covalent bond, -CH ₂ -, -0-, -OCH ₂ -, -CH ₂ 0-, -NH-, -N(CH ₃ )-, -NHCH ₂ - and -CH ₂ NH-;

R is H or C T; and

R ^B is an aromatic heterobicyclic radical selected from the group consisting of (b-l) to (b-6)

(b-4) (b-5) (b-6) wherein

a and b represent the position of attachment to CHR;

ring A represents a 6-membered aromatic ring optionally having one Nitrogen atom;

X ¹ and X ² each represent S or O;

m represents 1 or 2;

Y ¹ and Y ² are each independently selected from N and CF; with the proviso that when Y ¹ is N, Y ² is CF, and when Y ¹ is CF, Y ² is N;

X ³ and X ⁴ are each independently selected from N, S and O; with the proviso that when X ³ is N then X ⁴ is S or O, and when X ⁴ is N then X ³ is S or O;

Y ³ , Y ⁴ and Y ⁵ each represent CH, CF or N;

-Z'-Z ² - forms a bivalent radical selected from the group consisting of

-0(CH ₂ ) _n O- (c-l);

-0(CH ₂ ) _p - (C-2);

-(CH ₂ ) _P O- (C-3);

-0(CH ₂ ) _q NR ⁶ - (c-4);

-NR ⁶ (CH ₂ ) _q O- (c-5);

wherein

n represents 1 or 2;

p represents 2 or 3;

q represents 2 or 3; in particular 2;

R ¹ , R ² , and R ³ are each selected from Ci_ ₄ alkyl;

R ⁴ and R ⁵ are each selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, fluoro and methyl;

R ⁶ represents hydrogen or Ci_ ₄ alkyl; in particular hydrogen;

R ^c is selected from the group consisting of fluoro, methyl, hydroxy, methoxy, trifluoromethyl, and difluoromethyl;

R ^D is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, fluoro, methyl, hydroxy, methoxy, trifluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, and fluoromethyl; and

x represents 0, 1 or 2; with the provisos that

a) R ^c is not hydroxy or methoxy when present at the carbon atom adjacent to the nitrogen atom of the piperidinediyl ring;

b) R ^c and R° cannot be selected simultaneously from hydroxy or methoxy when R ^c is present at the carbon atom adjacent to C-R°;

c) R ^D is not hydroxy or methoxy when L ^A is -0-, -OCH2-, -CH2O-, -NH-,

-N(CH ₃ )-, -NH(CH ₂ )- or -(CH ₂ )NH-;

and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof Illustrative of the invention is a pharmaceutical composition comprising a

pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and any of the compounds described above. An illustration of the invention is a pharmaceutical composition made by mixing any of the compounds described above and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Illustrating the invention is a process for making a pharmaceutical composition comprising mixing any of the compounds described above and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.

Exemplifying the invention are methods of preventing or treating a disorder mediated by the inhibition of O-GlcNAc hydrolase (OGA), comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of any of the compounds or pharmaceutical compositions described above.

Further exemplifying the invention are methods of inhibiting OGA, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a prophylactically or a therapeutically effective amount of any of the compounds or pharmaceutical compositions described above.

An example of the invention is a method of preventing or treating a disorder selected from a tauopathy, in particular a tauopathy selected from the group consisting of Alzheimer’s disease, progressive supranuclear palsy, Down’s syndrome,

frontotemporal lobe dementia, frontotemporal dementia with Parkinsonism- 17, Pick’s disease, corticobasal degeneration, and agryophilic grain disease; or a

neurodegenerative disease accompanied by a tau pathology, in particular a

neurodegenerative disease selected from amyotrophic lateral sclerosis or

frontotemporal lobe dementia caused by C90RF72 mutations, comprising

administering to a subject in need thereof, a prophylactically or a therapeutically effective amount of any of the compounds or pharmaceutical compositions described above. Another example of the invention is any of the compounds described above for use in preventing or treating a tauopathy, in particular a tauopathy selected from the group consisting of Alzheimer’s disease, progressive supranuclear palsy, Down’s syndrome, frontotemporal lobe dementia, frontotemporal dementia with Parkinsonism- 17, Pick’s disease, corticobasal degeneration, and agryophilic grain disease; or a

neurodegenerative disease accompanied by a tau pathology, in particular a

neurodegenerative disease selected from amyotrophic lateral sclerosis or

frontotemporal lobe dementia caused by C90RF72 mutations, in a subject in need thereof

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The present invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as defined herein before, and pharmaceutically acceptable addition salts and solvates thereof. The compounds of Formula (I) are inhibitors of O-GlcNAc hydrolase (OGA) and may be useful in the prevention or treatment of tauopathies, in particular a tauopathy selected from the group consisting of Alzheimer’s disease, progressive supranuclear palsy, Down’s syndrome, frontotemporal lobe dementia, frontotemporal dementia with Parkinsonism- 17, Pick’s disease, corticobasal degeneration, and agryophilic grain disease; or maybe useful in the prevention or treatment of neurodegenerative diseases accompanied by a tau pathology, in particular a neurodegenerative disease selected from amyotrophic lateral sclerosis or frontotemporal lobe dementia caused by

C90RF72 mutations.

In a particular embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I) as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein

R ^A is a heteroaryl radical selected from the group consisting of pyridin-2-yl, pyridin-3-yl, pyridin-4-yl, pyridazin-3-yl, pyrimidin-4-yl, pyrimidin-5-yl, and pyrazin- 2-yl; each of which may be optionally substituted with 1, 2 or 3 substituents, in particular 2 substituents, each independently selected from the group consisting of halo; cyano; OH; Ci_ ₄ alkyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected halo substituents; C3-6cycloalkyl; -C(0)NR ^a R ^aa ; NR ^a R ^aa ; and Ci_ ₄ alkyloxy optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected halo substituents; wherein R ^a and R ^aa are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and Ci_ ₄ alkyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected halo substituents; or is phenyl optionally substituted with 1 , 2 or 3 substituents, each independently selected from the group consisting of halo and Ci_ ₄ alkyl;

and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof.

In a particular embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I) as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein

R ^A is a heteroaryl radical selected from the group consisting of pyridin-2-yl, pyridin-3-yl, pyridin-4-yl, pyridazin-3-yl, pyrimidin-4-yl, pyrimidin-5-yl, and pyrazin- 2-yl, each of which may be optionally substituted with 1, 2 or 3 substituents, in particular 2 substituents, each independently selected from the group consisting of halo; cyano; Ci_ ₄ alkyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected halo substituents; -C(0)NR ^a R ^aa ; NR ^a R ^aa ; and Ci_ ₄ alkyloxy optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected halo substituents; wherein R ^a and R ^aa are each

independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and Ci_ ₄ alkyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected halo substituents;

L ^A is selected from the group consisting of a covalent bond, -CH ₂ -, -0-, -OCH ₂ -, -CH ₂ 0-, -NH-, -N(CH ₃ )-, -NHCH ₂ - and -CH ₂ NH-;

R is H or CFh; and

R ^B is an aromatic heterobicyclic radical selected from the group consisting of (b-l) to (b-6)

(b-4) (b-5) (b-6)

wherein

a and b represent the position of attachment to CHR;

ring A represents a 6-membered aromatic ring optionally having one Nitrogen atom; X ¹ and X ² each represent S or O; m represents 1 or 2;

Y ¹ and Y ² are each independently selected from N and CF; with the proviso that when Y ¹ is N, Y ² is CF, and when Y ¹ is CF, Y ² is N;

X ³ and X ⁴ are each independently selected from N, S and O; with the proviso that when X ³ is N then X ⁴ is S or O, and when X ⁴ is N then X ³ is S or O;

Y ³ , Y ⁴ and Y ⁵ each represent CH, CF or N;

-Z'-Z ² - forms a bivalent radical selected from the group consisting of

-0(CH ₂ ) _n O- (c-l);

-0(CH ₂ ) _p - (C-2);

-(CH ₂ ) _P O- (C-3);

wherein

n represents 1 or 2;

p represents 2 or 3;

R ¹ , R ² , and R ³ are each selected from Ci_ ₄ alkyl;

R ⁴ and R ⁵ are each selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, fluoro and methyl;

R ^c is selected from the group consisting of fluoro, methyl, hydroxy, methoxy, trifluoromethyl, and difluoromethyl;

R ^D is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, fluoro, methyl, hydroxy, methoxy, trifluoromethyl, and difluoromethyl; and

x represents 0, 1 or 2;

with the provisos that

a) R ^c is not hydroxy or methoxy when present at the carbon atom adjacent to the nitrogen atom of the piperidinediyl ring;

b) R ^c and R° cannot be selected simultaneously from hydroxy or methoxy when R ^c is present at the carbon atom adjacent to C-R°;

c) R ^D is not hydroxy or methoxy when L ^A is -0-, -OCH ₂ -, -CFFO-, -NH-,

-N(CH ₃ )-, -NH(CH ₂ )- or -(CH ₂ )NH-;

and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof In a particular embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I) as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein R ^A is a heteroaryl radical selected from the group consisting of pyridin-4-yl, pyrimidin-4-yl, and pyrazin-2-yl, each of which may be optionally substituted with 1, 2 or 3 substituents, in particular 2 substituents, each independently selected from the group consisting of halo; cyano; Ci_ ₄ alkyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected halo substituents; -C(0)NR ^a R ^aa ; NR ^a R ^aa ; and Ci_ ₄ alkyloxy optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected halo substituents; wherein R ^a and R ^aa are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and Ci_ ₄ alkyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected halo substituents; and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof

In a particular embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein R ^A is a heteroaryl radical selected from the group consisting of pyridin-4-yl and pyrimidin-4-yl, each of which may be optionally substituted with 1 , 2 or 3 substituents, in particular 2 substituents, each independently selected from the group consisting of Ci_ ₄ alkyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected halo substituents; and Ci_ ₄ alkyloxy optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected halo substituents;

and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof

In a further embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein R ^A is a heteroaryl radical selected from the group consisting of pyridin-4-yl and pyrimidin-4-yl, each of which may be optionally substituted with 1 or 2 substituents, in particular 2 substituents, each independently selected from the group consisting of Ci_ ₄ alkyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected halo substituents; and Ci_ ₄ alkyloxy optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected halo substituents;

and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof

In a further embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein R ^A is a heteroaryl radical selected from the group consisting of pyridin-4-yl and pyrimidin-4-yl, each of which may be optionally substituted with 1 or 2 substituents, in particular 2 substituents, each independently selected from the group consisting of Ci_ ₄ alkyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected halo substituents; and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof

In an additional embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein L ^A is selected from the group consisting of -CH ₂ -, -0-, -OCH ₂ -, -CH ₂ 0-, -NH-, -N(CH ₃ )-, -NHCH ₂ - and -CH ₂ NH-;

and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof

In a further embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein L ^A is selected from the group consisting of -CH ₂ -, -0-, -OCH ₂ -, -CFFO-, and -NH-; and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof

In a further embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein L ^A is selected from the group consisting of -CH ₂ -, -0-, -OCH ₂ -, -CFFO-, and -NHCH ₂ -; and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof

In another embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein L ^A is selected from the group consisting of -CH ₂ -, -0-, -OCH ₂ -, and -CFFO-;

and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof

In a further embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein L ^A is -0-; and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof

In an additional embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein R ^B is an aromatic heterobicyclic radical selected from the group consisting of (b-l), (b-2), (b-3), (b-4) and (b-5);

and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof

In an additional embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein R ^B is an aromatic heterobicyclic radical selected from the group consisting of (b-l), (b-2), (b-4) and (b-5); wherein

-Z'-Z ² - forms a bivalent radical selected from the group consisting of (c-l) and (c-2), wherein n and p each represent 2;

and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof

In an additional embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein R ^B is an aromatic heterobicyclic radical selected from the group consisting of (b-3) and (b-4); wherein

-Z'-Z ² - forms a bivalent radical selected from the group consisting of (c-l) and (c-2), wherein n and p each represent 2; and wherein Y ¹ is N, Y ² is CF, and R ³ is Ci_ ₄ alkyl; and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof

In an additional embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein R ^B is an aromatic heterobicyclic radical selected from the group consisting of (b-l), (b-2), (b-4) and (b-5); wherein

X ¹ and X ² represent S;

Y ³ represents CH or N;

-Z'-Z ² - forms a bivalent radical selected from the group consisting of (c-l) and (c-2), wherein n and p each represent 2;

R ¹ and R ² are each selected from Ci- ₄ alkyl; and

R ⁴ and R ⁵ each represent hydrogen or fluoro;

and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof In yet another embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein

R ^B is an aromatic heterobicyclic radical selected from the group consisting of

and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof

In yet another embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein

R ^B is an aromatic heterobicyclic radical selected from the group consisting of

and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof.

In yet another embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein R ^B is an aromatic heterobicyclic radical selected from the group consisting of

and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof.

In an additional embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein x is 0 or 1 ; and R ^c when present, is fluoro or methyl, in particular methyl; and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof

In an additional embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein x is 0; and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof

In an additional embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I), as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein R ^D is hydrogen; and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof

In a particular embodiment, the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (I) as referred to herein, and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein and the tautomers and the stereoisomeric forms thereof, wherein

R ^A is pyridin-4-yl or pyrimidin-4-yl, each of which may be optionally substituted with 1, 2 or 3 substituents, in particular 1 or 2 substituents, each independently selected from the group consisting of Ci_ ₄ alkyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected halo substituents;

L ^A is selected from the group consisting of a -CH ₂ -, -0-, -OCFF-,

-CH2O-, and -NH-;

R is CFb; and

R ^B is an aromatic heterobicyclic radical selected from the group consisting of (b-l) to (b-6)

R ^D is hydrogen; and x represents 0;

and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the solvates thereof.

DEFINITIONS

“Halo” shall denote fluoro, chloro and bromo;“Ci- ₄ alkyl” shall denote a straight or branched saturated alkyl group having 1, 2, 3 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively e.g.

methyl, ethyl, 1 -propyl, 2-propyl, butyl, 1 -methyl-propyl, 2-methyl- 1 -propyl, l,l-dimethylethyl, and the like;“C3-6cycloalkyl” shall denote cyclopropyl, cyclo butyl, cyclopentyl, and cyclohexyl;“Ci- ₄ alkyloxy” shall denote an ether radical wherein Ci_ ₄ alkyl is as defined before. When reference is made to L ^A , the definition is to be read from left to right, with the left part of the linker bound to R ^A and the right part of the linker bound to the pyrrolidinediyl or piperidinediyl ring. Thus, when L ^A is, for example, -O-CH2-, then R ^A -L ^A - is R ^A -0-CH ₂ -. When R ^c is present more than once, where possible, it may be bound at the same carbon atom of the pyrrolidinediyl or piperidinediyl ring, and each instance may be different.

In general, whenever the term“substituted” is used in the present invention, it is meant, unless otherwise indicated or is clear from the context, to indicate that one or more hydrogens, in particular 1 to 3 hydrogens, preferably 1 or 2 hydrogens, more preferably 1 hydrogen, on the atom or radical indicated in the expression using“substituted” are replaced with a selection of substituents from the indicated group, provided that the normal valency is not exceeded, and that the substitution results in a chemically stable compound, i.e. a compound that is sufficiently robust to survive isolation to a useful degree of purity from a reaction mixture, and formulation into a therapeutic agent.

The term "subject" as used herein, refers to an animal, preferably a mammal, most preferably a human, who is or has been the object of treatment, observation or experiment. As used herein, the term“subject” therefore encompasses patients, as well as asymptomatic or presymptomatic individuals at risk of developing a disease or condition as defined herein.

The term "therapeutically effective amount" as used herein, means that amount of active compound or pharmaceutical agent that elicits the biological or medicinal response in a tissue system, animal or human that is being sought by a researcher, veterinarian, medical doctor or other clinician, which includes alleviation of the symptoms of the disease or disorder being treated. The term "prophylactically effective amount" as used herein, means that amount of active compound or pharmaceutical agent that substantially reduces the potential for onset of the disease or disorder being prevented.

As used herein, the term "composition" is intended to encompass a product comprising the specified ingredients in the specified amounts, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from combinations of the specified ingredients in the specified amounts.

Hereinbefore and hereinafter, the term“compound of Formula (I)” is meant to include the addition salts, the solvates and the stereoisomers thereof.

The terms“stereoisomers” or“stereochemically isomeric forms” hereinbefore or hereinafter are used interchangeably.

The invention includes all stereoisomers of the compound of Formula (I) either as a pure stereoisomer or as a mixture of two or more stereoisomers.

Enantiomers are stereoisomers that are non-superimposable mirror images of each other. A 1:1 mixture of a pair of enantiomers is a racemate or racemic mixture.

Diastereomers (or diastereoisomers) are stereoisomers that are not enantiomers, i.e. they are not related as mirror images. If a compound contains a double bond, the substituents may be in the E or the Z configuration. If a compound contains a disubstituted cycloalkyl group, the substituents may be in the cis or trans configuration. Therefore, the invention includes enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates, E isomers, Z isomers, cis isomers, trans isomers and mixtures thereof.

The absolute configuration is specified according to the Cahn-Ingold-Prelog system. The configuration at an asymmetric atom is specified by either R or S. Resolved compounds whose absolute configuration is not known can be designated by (+) or (-) depending on the direction in which they rotate plane polarized light.

When a specific stereoisomer is identified, this means that said stereoisomer is substantially free, i.e. associated with less than 50%, preferably less than 20%, more preferably less than 10%, even more preferably less than 5%, in particular less than 2% and most preferably less than 1%, of the other isomers. Thus, when a compound of formula (I) is for instance specified as (R), this means that the compound is

substantially free of the (S) isomer; when a compound of formula (I) is for instance specified as E, this means that the compound is substantially free of the Z isomer; when a compound of formula (I) is for instance specified as cis, this means that the compound is substantially free of the trans isomer. For use in medicine, the addition salts of the compounds of this invention refer to non toxic "pharmaceutically acceptable addition salts". Other salts may, however, be useful in the preparation of compounds according to this invention or of their

pharmaceutically acceptable addition salts. Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable addition salts of the compounds include acid addition salts which may, for example, be formed by mixing a solution of the compound with a solution of a pharmaceutically acceptable acid such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, succinic acid, acetic acid, benzoic acid, citric acid, tartaric acid, carbonic acid or phosphoric acid. Furthermore, where the compounds of the invention carry an acidic moiety, suitable pharmaceutically acceptable addition salts thereof may include alkali metal salts, e.g., sodium or potassium salts; alkaline earth metal salts, e.g., calcium or magnesium salts; and salts formed with suitable organic ligands, e.g., quaternary ammonium salts.

Representative acids which may be used in the preparation of pharmaceutically acceptable addition salts include, but are not limited to, the following: acetic acid, 2,2-dichloroactic acid, acylated amino acids, adipic acid, alginic acid, ascorbic acid, L-aspartic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, benzoic acid, 4- acetamidobenzoic acid, (+)-camphoric acid, camphorsulfonic acid, capric acid, caproic acid, caprylic acid, cinnamic acid, citric acid, cyclamic acid, ethane- 1 ,2-disulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonic acid, formic acid, fumaric acid, galactaric acid, gentisic acid, glucoheptonic acid, D-gluconic acid, D-glucoronic acid, L-glutamic acid, beta- oxo-glutaric acid, glycolic acid, hippuric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydrochloric acid, (+)-L-lactic acid, (±)-DL-lactic acid, lactobionic acid, maleic acid, (-)-L-malic acid, malonic acid, (±)-DL-mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, naphthalene-2-sulfonic acid, naphthalene- 1,5- disulfonic acid, l-hydroxy-2-naphthoic acid, nicotinic acid, nitric acid, oleic acid, orotic acid, oxalic acid, palmitic acid, pamoic acid, phosphoric acid, L- pyroglutamic acid, salicylic acid, 4-amino -salicylic acid, sebacic acid, stearic acid, succinic acid, sulfuric acid, tannic acid, (+)-L-tartaric acid, thiocyanic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, trifluoromethylsulfonic acid, and undecylenic acid.

Representative bases which may be used in the preparation of pharmaceutically acceptable addition salts include, but are not limited to, the following: ammonia, L-arginine, benethamine, benzathine, calcium hydroxide, choline, dimethylethanol- amine, diethanolamine, diethylamine, 2-(diethylamino)-ethanol, ethanolamine, ethylene-diamine, A-mcthyl-glucaminc, hydrabamine, 1 //-imidazole, L-lysine, magnesium hydroxide, 4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-morpholine, piperazine, potassium hydroxide, l-(2-hydroxyethyl)-pyrrolidine, secondary amine, sodium hydroxide, triethanolamine, tromethamine and zinc hydroxide.

The names of compounds were generated according to the nomenclature rules agreed upon by the Chemical Abstracts Service (CAS) or according to the nomenclature rules agreed upon by the International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry (IUPAC).

PREPARATION OF THE FINAL COMPOUNDS

The compounds according to the invention can generally be prepared by a succession of steps, each of which is known to the skilled person. In particular, the compounds can be prepared according to the following synthesis methods.

The compounds of Formula (I) may be synthesized in the form of racemic mixtures of enantiomers which can be separated from one another following art-known resolution procedures. The racemic compounds of Formula (I) may be converted into the corresponding diastereomeric salt forms by reaction with a suitable chiral acid. Said diastereomeric salt forms are subsequently separated, for example, by selective or fractional crystallization and the enantiomers are liberated therefrom by alkali. An alternative manner of separating the enantiomeric forms of the compounds of Formula (I) involves liquid chromatography using a chiral stationary phase. Said pure stereochemically isomeric forms may also be derived from the corresponding pure stereochemically isomeric forms of the appropriate starting materials, provided that the reaction occurs stereospecifically.

EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE 1

The final compounds of Formula (I) can be prepared by reacting an intermediate compound of Formula (II) with a compound of Formula (III) followed by reaction of the formed imine derivative with an intermediate compound of Formula (IV) according to reaction scheme (1). The reaction is performed in a suitable reaction- inert solvent, such as, for example, anhydrous dichloromethane, a Lewis acid, such as, for example titanium tetraisopropoxide, under thermal conditions, such as, 0 °C to room

temperature, for example, 0 °C or room temperature, for a sufficient period of time to drive the reaction to completion, for example for 1 hour to 24 hours. In reaction scheme (1) all variables are defined as in Formula (I), and wherein halo is chloro, bromo or iodo.

(iv)

(H) (i)

Reaction scheme 1

EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE 2

Additionally, final compounds of Formula (I) can be prepared by reacting an intermediate compound of Formula (II) with a compound of Formula (V) according to reaction scheme (2). The reaction is performed in a suitable reaction-inert solvent, such as, for example, acetonitrile, a suitable base, such as, for example, potassium carbonate, under thermal conditions, such as, room temperature to 70 °C, for example room temperature or 70 °C, for a sufficient period of time to drive the reaction to completion, for example for 1 hour to 24 hours. In reaction scheme (2) all variables are defined as in Formula (I), and wherein halo is chloro, bromo or iodo.

halo

(II) (l)

Reaction scheme 2

EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE 3

Intermediate compounds of Formula (II) can be prepared by cleaving a protecting group in an intermediate compound of Formula (VI) according to reaction scheme (3). In reaction scheme (3) all variables are defined as in Formula (I), and PG is a suitable protecting group of the nitrogen function such as, for example, fc/ -butoxycarbonyl (Boc). Suitable methods for removing such protecting groups are widely known to the person skilled in the art and comprise but are not limited to, treatment with a protic acid, such as, for example, trifluoroacetic acid, in a reaction inert solvent, such as, for example, l,4-dioxane or with an acidic resin, such as for example, Amberlist ® 15 hydrogen form in a reaction inert solvent such as methanol. In reaction scheme (3) all variables are defined as in Formula (I).

Reaction scheme 3

EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE 4

Intermediate compounds of Formula (VI) wherein L ^A is -O- or -0-CFE- can be prepared by reaction of an intermediate compound of Formula (VII) with a halo compound of Formula (VIII) according to reaction scheme (4). The reaction is performed in a suitable reaction-inert solvent, such as, for example, dimethylsulfoxide or dimethylformamide, and a suitable base, such as, for example, potassium or sodium fc/ -butoxidc, sodium hydride or potassium carbonate, under thermal conditions, such as, room temperature to 70 °C, for example at room temperature or 70 °C, for a sufficient period of time to drive the reaction to completion, for example for 1 hour or 48 hours. In reaction scheme (4) all variables are defined as in Formula (I), PG is a suitable protecting group of the nitrogen function such as, for example, tert- butoxycarbonyl (Boc) and halo is chloro, bromo or iodo.

Reaction scheme 4

EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE 5

Intermediate compounds of Formula (VI) wherein L ^A is -O- or -0-CFE- can be prepared by reaction of an intermediate compound of Formula (VII) with a hidroxy compound of Formula (IX) under Mitsunobu reaction conditione according to reaction scheme (5). The reaction is performed in a suitable reaction-inert solvent, such as, for example, THF, in the presence of a phosphine reagent, such as triphenylphospine, and a coupling reagent such as DIAD or DBAD, under thermal conditions, such as, room temperature to 120 °C, for example at room temperature or 120 °C, for a sufficient period of time to drive the reaction to completion, for example for 1 hour or 48 hours. In reaction scheme (5) all variables are defined as in Formula (I), PG is a suitable protecting group of the nitrogen function such as, for example, /e/t-butoxycarbonyl (Boc).

Reaction scheme 5

EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE 6

Intermediate compounds of Formula (VI) wherein L ^A is or -CEE-O- can be prepared by reaction of an intermediate compound of Formula (X) with a hidroxy compound of Formula (IX) under Mitsunobu reaction conditione according to reaction scheme (5). The reaction is performed in a suitable reaction-inert solvent, such as, for example, THF, in the presence of a phosphine reagent, such as triphenylphospine, and a coupling reagent such as DIAD or DBAD, under thermal conditions, such as, room temperature to 120 °C, for example at room temperature or 120 °C, for a sufficient period of time to drive the reaction to completion, for example for 4 hour or 48 hours. In reaction scheme (6) all variables are defined as in Formula (I), PG is a suitable protecting group of the nitrogen function such as, for example, /e/t-butoxycarbonyl (Boc).

Reaction scheme 6

EXPERIMENT AL PROCEDURE 7

Intermediate compounds of Formula (VI) wherein L ^A is -CH2-O- can be prepared by reaction of an intermediate compound of Formula (X) with a halo compound of Formula (VIII) according to reaction scheme (4). The reaction is performed in a suitable reaction-inert solvent, such as, for example, dimethylsulfoxide or dimethylformamide, in the presence of a suitable base, such as, for example, potassium or sodium fc/ -butoxidc, sodium hydride or potassium carbonate, under thermal conditions, such as, room temperature to 70 °C, for example at room temperature or 70 °C, for a sufficient period of time to drive the reaction to completion, for example for 1 hour or 48 hours. In reaction scheme (7) all variables are defined as in Formula (I), PG is a suitable protecting group of the nitrogen function such as, for example, tert- butoxycarbonyl (Boc) and halo is chloro, bromo or iodo.

Reaction scheme 7

EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE 8

Intermediate compounds of Formula (VI) wherein L ^A is -NH- can be prepared by reaction of an intermediate compound of Formula (XI) with a halo compound of Formula (VIII) according to reaction scheme (8). The reaction is performed in a suitable reaction-inert solvent, such as, for example, toluene, in the presence of a suitable base, such as, for example, potassium or sodium fc/Y-butoxidc, a suitable catalyst, such as for example, Pd ₂ dba3, and a suitable phosphine, such as for example, XPhos, under thermal conditions, such as for example 120 °C, for a sufficient period of time to drive the reaction to completion, for example for or 14 hours. In reaction scheme (8) all variables are defined as in Formula (I), PG is a suitable protecting group of the nitrogen function such as, for example, fe/t-butoxycarbonyl (Boc) and halo is chloro, bromo or iodo.

Reaction scheme 8 Intermediates of Formula (III), (IV), (V), (VII), (VIII), (IX), (X), (XI) are commercially available or can be prepared by known procedures to those skilled in the art.

PHARMACOLOGY

The compounds of the present invention and the pharmaceutically acceptable compositions thereof inhibit O-GlcNAc hydrolase (OGA) and therefore may be useful in the treatment or prevention of diseases involving tau pathology, also known as tauopathies, and diseases with tau inclusions. Such diseases include, but are not limited to Alzheimer’s disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis and parkinsonism-dementia complex, argyrophilic grain disease, chronic traumatic encephalopathy, corticobasal degeneration, diffuse neurofibrillary tangles with calcification, Down’s syndrome, Familial British dementia, Familial Danish dementia, Frontotemporal dementia and parkinsonism linked to chromosome 17 (caused by MAPT mutations), Frontotemporal lobar degeneration (some cases caused by C90RF72 mutations), Gerstmann-Straussler- Scheinker disease, Guadeloupean parkinsonism, myotonic dystrophy,

neurodegeneration with brain iron accumulation, Niemann-Pick disease, type C, non- Guamanian motor neuron disease with neurofibrillary tangles, Pick’s disease, postencephalitic parkinsonism, prion protein cerebral amyloid angiopathy, progressive subcortical gliosis, progressive supranuclear palsy, SLC9A6-related mental retardation, subacute sclerosing panencephalitis, tangle-only dementia, and white matter tauopathy with globular glial inclusions.

As used herein, the term“treatment” is intended to refer to all processes, wherein there may be a slowing, interrupting, arresting or stopping of the progression of a disease or an alleviation of symptoms, but does not necessarily indicate a total elimination of all symptoms. As used herein, the term“prevention” is intended to refer to all processes, wherein there may be a slowing, interrupting, arresting or stopping of the onset of a disease.

The invention also relates to a compound according to the general Formula (I), a stereoisomeric form thereof or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base addition salt thereof, for use in the treatment or prevention of diseases or conditions selected from the group consisting of Alzheimer’s disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis and parkinsonism-dementia complex, argyrophilic grain disease, chronic traumatic encephalopathy, corticobasal degeneration, diffuse neurofibrillary tangles with calcification, Down’s syndrome, Familial British dementia, Familial Danish dementia, Frontotemporal dementia and parkinsonism linked to chromosome 17 (caused by MAPT mutations), Frontotemporal lobar degeneration (some cases caused by C90RF72 mutations), Gerstmann-Straussler-Scheinker disease, Guadeloupean parkinsonism, myotonic dystrophy, neurodegeneration with brain iron accumulation, Niemann-Pick disease, type C, non-Guamanian motor neuron disease with

neurofibrillary tangles, Pick’s disease, postencephalitic parkinsonism, prion protein cerebral amyloid angiopathy, progressive subcortical gliosis, progressive supranuclear palsy, SLC9A6-related mental retardation, subacute sclerosing panencephalitis, tangle- only dementia, and white matter tauopathy with globular glial inclusions.

The invention also relates to a compound according to the general Formula (I), a stereoisomeric form thereof or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base addition salt thereof, for use in the treatment, prevention, amelioration, control or reduction of the risk of diseases or conditions selected from the group consisting of Alzheimer’s disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis and parkinsonism-dementia complex,

argyrophilic grain disease, chronic traumatic encephalopathy, corticobasal

degeneration, diffuse neurofibrillary tangles with calcification, Down’s syndrome, Familial British dementia, Familial Danish dementia, Frontotemporal dementia and parkinsonism linked to chromosome 17 (caused by MAPT mutations), Frontotemporal lobar degeneration (some cases caused by C90RF72 mutations), Gerstmann-Straussler- Scheinker disease, Guadeloupean parkinsonism, myotonic dystrophy,

neurodegeneration with brain iron accumulation, Niemann-Pick disease, type C, non- Guamanian motor neuron disease with neurofibrillary tangles, Pick’s disease, postencephalitic parkinsonism, prion protein cerebral amyloid angiopathy, progressive subcortical gliosis, progressive supranuclear palsy, SLC9A6-related mental retardation, subacute sclerosing panencephalitis, tangle-only dementia, and white matter tauopathy with globular glial inclusions.

In particular, the diseases or conditions may in particular be selected from a tauopathy, more in particular a tauopathy selected from the group consisting of Alzheimer’s disease, progressive supranuclear palsy, Down’s syndrome, frontotemporal lobe dementia, frontotemporal dementia with Parkinsonism- 17, Pick’s disease, corticobasal degeneration, and agryophilic grain disease; or the diseases or conditions may in particular be neurodegenerative diseases accompanied by a tau pathology, more in particular a neurodegenerative disease selected from amyotrophic lateral sclerosis or frontotemporal lobe dementia caused by C90RF72 mutations.

Preclinical states in Alzheimer’s and tauopathy diseases:

In recent years the United States (US) National Institute for Aging and the International Working Group have proposed guidelines to better define the preclinical

(asymptomatic) stages of AD (Dubois B, et al. Lancet Neurol. 2014;13:614-629; Sperling, RA, et al. Alzheimers Dement. 2011;7:280-292). Hypothetical models postulate that Ab accumulation and tau-aggregation begins many years before the onset of overt clinical impairment. The key risk factors for elevated amyloid accumulation, tau-aggregation and development of AD are age (ie, 65 years or older), APOE genotype, and family history. Approximately one third of clinically normal older individuals over 75 years of age demonstrate evidence of Ab or tau accumulation on PET amyloid and tau imaging studies, the latter being less advanced currently. In addition, reduced Abeta-levels in CSF measurements are observed, whereas levels of non-modified as well as phosphorylated tau are elevated in CSF. Similar findings are seen in large autopsy studies and it has been shown that tau aggregates are detected in the brain as early as 20 years of age and younger. Amyloid-positive (Ab+) clinically normal individuals consistently demonstrate evidence of an“AD-like endophenotype” on other biomarkers, including disrupted functional network activity in both functional magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) and resting state connectivity,

fluorodeoxyglucose ¹⁸ F (FDG) hypometabolism, cortical thinning, and accelerated rates of atrophy. Accumulating longitudinal data also strongly suggests that Ab+ clinically normal individuals are at increased risk for cognitive decline and progression to mild cognitive impairment (MCI) and AD dementia. The Alzheimer’s scientific community is of the consensus that these Ab+ clinically normal individuals represent an early stage in the continuum of AD pathology. Thus, it has been argued that intervention with a therapeutic agent that decreases Ab production or the aggregation of tau is likely to be more effective if started at a disease stage before widespread neurodegeneration has occurred. A number of pharmaceutical companies are currently testing BACE inhibition in prodromal AD.

Thanks to evolving bio marker research, it is now possible to identify Alzheimer’s disease at a preclinical stage before the occurrence of the first symptoms. All the different issues relating to preclinical Alzheimer’s disease such as, definitions and lexicon, the limits, the natural history, the markers of progression and the ethical consequences of detecting the disease at the asymptomatic stage, are reviewed in Alzheimer’s & Dementia 12 (2016) 292-323.

Two categories of individuals may be recognized in preclinical Alzheimer’s disease or tauopathies. Cognitively normal individuals with amyloid beta or tau aggregation evident on PET scans, or changes in CSF Abeta, tau and phospho-tau are defined as being in an“asymptomatic at risk state for Alzheimer’s disease (AR-AD)” or in a “asymptomatic state of tauopathy”. Individuals with a fully penetrant dominant autosomal mutation for familial Alzheimer’s disease are said to have“presymptomatic Alzheimer’s disease”. Dominant autosomal mutations within the tau-protein have been described for multiple forms of tauopathies as well.

Thus, in an embodiment, the invention also relates to a compound according to the general Formula (I), a stereoisomeric form thereof or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base addition salt thereof, for use in control or reduction of the risk of preclinical Alzheimer’s disease, prodromal Alzheimer’s disease, or tau-related neurodegeneration as observed in different forms of tauopathies.

As already mentioned hereinabove, the term“treatment” does not necessarily indicate a total elimination of all symptoms, but may also refer to symptomatic treatment in any of the disorders mentioned above. In view of the utility of the compound of Formula (I), there is provided a method of treating subjects such as warm-blooded animals, including humans, suffering from or a method of preventing subjects such as warm blooded animals, including humans, suffering from any one of the diseases mentioned hereinbefore.

Said methods comprise the administration, i.e. the systemic or topical administration, preferably oral administration, of a prophylactically or a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula (I), a stereoisomeric form thereof, a

pharmaceutically acceptable addition salt or solvate thereof, to a subject such as a warm-blooded animal, including a human.

Therefore, the invention also relates to a method for the prevention and/or treatment of any of the diseases mentioned hereinbefore comprising administering a

prophylactically or a therapeutically effective amount of a compound according to the invention to a subject in need thereof.

The invention also relates to a method for modulating O-GlcNAc hydrolase (OGA) activity, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof, a prophylactically or a therapeutically effective amount of a compound according to the invention and as defined in the claims or a pharmaceutical composition according to the invention and as defined in the claims.

A method of treatment may also include administering the active ingredient on a regimen of between one and four intakes per day. In these methods of treatment the compounds according to the invention are preferably formulated prior to

administration. As described herein below, suitable pharmaceutical formulations are prepared by known procedures using well known and readily available ingredients. The compounds of the present invention, that can be suitable to treat or prevent any of the disorders mentioned above or the symptoms thereof, may be administered alone or in combination with one or more additional therapeutic agents. Combination therapy includes administration of a single pharmaceutical dosage formulation which contains a compound of Formula (I) and one or more additional therapeutic agents, as well as administration of the compound of Formula (I) and each additional therapeutic agent in its own separate pharmaceutical dosage formulation. For example, a compound of Formula (I) and a therapeutic agent may be administered to the patient together in a single oral dosage composition such as a tablet or capsule, or each agent may be administered in separate oral dosage formulations.

A skilled person will be familiar with alternative nomenclatures, nosologies, and classification systems for the diseases or conditions referred to herein. For example, the fifth edition of the Diagnostic & Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-5™) of the American Psychiatric Association utilizes terms such as neurocognitive disorders (NCDs) (both major and mild), in particular, neurocognitive disorders due to

Alzheimer’s disease. Such terms may be used as an alternative nomenclature for some of the diseases or conditions referred to herein by the skilled person.

PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS

The present invention also provides compositions for preventing or treating diseases in which inhibition of O-GlcNAc hydrolase (OGA) is beneficial, such as Alzheimer’s disease, progressive supranuclear palsy, Down’s syndrome, frontotemporal lobe dementia, frontotemporal dementia with Parkinsonism- 17, Pick’s disease, corticobasal degeneration, agryophilic grain disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis or frontotemporal lobe dementia caused by C90RF72 mutations, said compositions comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a compound according to formula (I) and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.

While it is possible for the active ingredient to be administered alone, it is preferable to present it as a pharmaceutical composition. Accordingly, the present invention further provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound according to the present invention, together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent. The carrier or diluent must be“acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the composition and not deleterious to the recipients thereof.

The pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy. A therapeutically effective amount of the particular compound, in base form or addition salt form, as the active ingredient is combined in intimate admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, which may take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for administration. These pharmaceutical compositions are desirably in unitary dosage form suitable, preferably, for systemic administration such as oral, percutaneous or parenteral administration; or topical administration such as via inhalation, a nose spray, eye drops or via a cream, gel, shampoo or the like. For example, in preparing the compositions in oral dosage form, any of the usual pharmaceutical media may be employed, such as, for example, water, glycols, oils, alcohols and the like in the case of oral liquid preparations such as suspensions, syrups, elixirs and solutions; or solid carriers such as starches, sugars, kaolin, lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents and the like in the case of powders, pills, capsules and tablets. Because of their ease in administration, tablets and capsules represent the most advantageous oral dosage unit form, in which case solid

pharmaceutical carriers are obviously employed. For parenteral compositions, the carrier will usually comprise sterile water, at least in large part, though other ingredients, for example, to aid solubility, may be included. Injectable solutions, for example, may be prepared in which the carrier comprises saline solution, glucose solution or a mixture of saline and glucose solution. Injectable suspensions may also be prepared in which case appropriate liquid carriers, suspending agents and the like may be employed. In the compositions suitable for percutaneous administration, the carrier optionally comprises a penetration enhancing agent and/or a suitable wettable agent, optionally combined with suitable additives of any nature in minor proportions, which additives do not cause any significant deleterious effects on the skin. Said additives may facilitate the administration to the skin and/or may be helpful for preparing the desired compositions. These compositions may be administered in various ways, e.g., as a transdermal patch, as a spot-on or as an ointment.

It is especially advantageous to formulate the aforementioned pharmaceutical compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. Dosage unit form as used in the specification and claims herein refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active ingredient calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. Examples of such dosage unit forms are tablets (including scored or coated tablets), capsules, pills, powder packets, wafers, injectable solutions or suspensions, teaspoonfuls, tablespoonfuls and the like, and segregated multiples thereof. The exact dosage and frequency of administration depends on the particular compound of Formula (I) used, the particular condition being treated, the severity of the condition being treated, the age, weight, sex, extent of disorder and general physical condition of the particular patient as well as other medication the individual may be taking, as is well known to those skilled in the art. Furthermore, it is evident that said effective daily amount may be lowered or increased depending on the response of the treated subject and/or depending on the evaluation of the physician prescribing the compounds of the instant invention.

Depending on the mode of administration, the pharmaceutical composition will comprise from 0.05 to 99% by weight, preferably from 0.1 to 70% by weight, more preferably from 0.1 to 50% by weight of the active ingredient, and, from 1 to 99.95% by weight, preferably from 30 to 99.9% by weight, more preferably from 50 to 99.9% by weight of a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, all percentages being based on the total weight of the composition.

The present compounds can be used for systemic administration such as oral, percutaneous or parenteral administration; or topical administration such as via inhalation, a nose spray, eye drops or via a cream, gel, shampoo or the like. The compounds are preferably orally administered. The exact dosage and frequency of administration depends on the particular compound according to Formula (I) used, the particular condition being treated, the severity of the condition being treated, the age, weight, sex, extent of disorder and general physical condition of the particular patient as well as other medication the individual may be taking, as is well known to those skilled in the art. Furthermore, it is evident that said effective daily amount may be lowered or increased depending on the response of the treated subject and/or depending on the evaluation of the physician prescribing the compounds of the instant invention.

The amount of a compound of Formula (I) that can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the disease treated, the mammalian species, and the particular mode of administration. However, as a general guide, suitable unit doses for the compounds of the present invention can, for example, preferably contain between 0.1 mg to about 1000 mg of the active compound. A preferred unit dose is between 1 mg to about 500 mg. A more preferred unit dose is between 1 mg to about 300 mg. Even more preferred unit dose is between 1 mg to about 100 mg. Such unit doses can be administered more than once a day, for example, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 times a day, but preferably 1 or 2 times per day, so that the total dosage for a 70 kg adult is in the range of 0.001 to about 15 mg per kg weight of subject per administration. A preferred dosage is 0.01 to about 1.5 mg per kg weight of subject per administration, and such therapy can extend for a number of weeks or months, and in some cases, years. It will be understood, however, that the specific dose level for any particular patient will depend on a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the individual being treated; the time and route of administration; the rate of excretion; other drugs that have previously been administered; and the severity of the particular disease undergoing therapy, as is well understood by those of skill in the area.

A typical dosage can be one 1 mg to about 100 mg tablet or 1 mg to about 300 mg taken once a day, or, multiple times per day, or one time-release capsule or tablet taken once a day and containing a proportionally higher content of active ingredient. The time-release effect can be obtained by capsule materials that dissolve at different pH values, by capsules that release slowly by osmotic pressure, or by any other known means of controlled release.

It can be necessary to use dosages outside these ranges in some cases as will be apparent to those skilled in the art. Further, it is noted that the clinician or treating physician will know how and when to start, interrupt, adjust, or terminate therapy in conjunction with individual patient response.

The invention also provides a kit comprising a compound according to the invention, prescribing information also known as“leaflet”, a blister package or bottle, and a container. Furthermore, the invention provides a kit comprising a pharmaceutical composition according to the invention, prescribing information also known as “leaflet”, a blister package or bottle, and a container. The prescribing information preferably includes advice or instructions to a patient regarding the administration of the compound or the pharmaceutical composition according to the invention. In particular, the prescribing information includes advice or instruction to a patient regarding the administration of said compound or pharmaceutical composition according to the invention, on how the compound or the pharmaceutical composition according to the invention is to be used, for the prevention and/or treatment of a tauopathy in a subject in need thereof. Thus, in an embodiment, the invention provides a kit of parts comprising a compound of Formula (I) or a stereoisomeric for thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a solvate thereof, or a pharmaceutical

composition comprising said compound, and instructions for preventing or treating a tauopathy. The kit referred to herein can be, in particular, a pharmaceutical package suitable for commercial sale.

For the compositions, methods and kits provided above, one of skill in the art will understand that preferred compounds for use in each are those compounds that are noted as preferred above. Still further preferred compounds for the compositions, methods and kits are those compounds provided in the non-limiting Examples below.

EXPERIMENTAL PART

Hereinafter, the term“min” means minutes,“h” means hours,“ACN”“CH3CN” or “MeCN” mean acetonitrile, “aq.” means aqueous, “/-BuOH” means tert- butanol, “DMF” means dimethylformamide, “DMSO” means dimethylsulfoxide,“r.t.” or“RT” means room temperature,“rac” or“RS” means racemic,“sat.” means saturated,“SFC” means supercritical fluid chromatography, “SFC-MS” means supercritical fluid chromatography/mass spectrometry, “LC-MS” means liquid chromatography/mass spectrometry,“HPLC” means high-performance liquid chromatography,“iPrOH” means isopropyl alcohol,“iPrNH ₂ ” means isopropyl amine,“t-PrOH” means tert- butyl alcohol, “RP” means reversed phase,“R _t ” means retention time (in minutes),“[M+H] ⁺ ” means the protonated mass of the free base of the compound,“wt” means weight,“THF” means tetrahydrofuran, “EtOAc” means ethyl acetate, “DCM” means dichloromethane, “MeOH” means methanol,“sol.” means solution,“EtOH” means ethanol,“TFA” means trifluoroacetic acid,“TBAF” means tetrabutylammonium fluoride,“DMAP” means 4- (dimethylamino)pyridine ,“NaH” means sodium hydride ,“DIAD” means diisopropyl azodicarboxylate ,“DBAD” means di-fe/t-butyl azodicarboxylate ,“NaO/Bu” means sodium fc/Y-butoxidc,“/BuOK” means potassium /erf-butoxidc ,“Pd(OAc)2” means palladium(II) acetate, “Pd ₂ dba3” means tris(dibenzylideneaeetone)dipalladium(0), “PdCl ₂ (PPh3) ₂ ” means bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) dichloride,“PdCl ₂ (dppf)” means [l,r-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II),� ��m-CPBA” means 3-chloroperbenzoic acid, “XPhos” means 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2’,4’,6’- triisopropylbiphenyl, “DMA” means A,A-dimethylacetamide, “NMP” means methylpyrrolidinone,“Dppf’ means l,r-ferrocenediyl-bis(diphenylphosphine),“Me- THF” means 2-methyltetrahydrofuran, “n-BuLi” means «-butyl lithiu, “LiHMDS” means lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide,“Et3N” means triethylamine,“AIBN” means 2,2’-azobis(2-methylpropionitrile), “DAST” means (diethylamino)sulfur trifluoride, “Ti(Oi-Pr) ₄ ” means titanium(IV) isopropoxide. Whenever the notation“RS” is indicated herein, it denotes that the compound is a racemic mixture at the indicated centre, unless otherwise indicated. The stereochemical configuration for centres in some compounds has been designated“i?” or“X’ when the mixture(s) was separated; for some compounds, the stereochemical configuration at indicated centres has been designated as“*i?” or“*S” when the absolute stereochemistry is undetermined although the compound itself has been isolated as a single stereoisomer and is enantiomerically/diastereomerically pure. The enantiomeric excess of compounds reported herein was determined by analysis of the racemic mixture by supercritical fluid chromatography (SFC) followed by SFC comparison of the separated enantiomer(s).

Thin layer chromatography (TLC) was carried out on silica gel 60 F254 plates (Merck) using reagent grade solvents. .

Automated flash column chromatography was performed using ready-to-connect cartridges, on irregular silica gel, particle size 15-40 pm (normal phase disposable flash columns) on different flash systems: either a SPOT or LAFLASH systems from Armen Instrument, or 971-FP systems from Agilent, or Isolera 1SV systems from Biotage. PREPARATION OF THE INTERMEDIATES

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 1

Method 1 : potassium fc/ -butoxidc (CAS: 865-47-4, 1.62 g, 14.41 mmol) was added portionwise to a stirred solution of tert- butyl 4-hydroxypiperidine-l-carboxylate (CAS: 109384-19-2; 1.45 g, 7.20 mmol) and 4-chloro-2, 6-dimethyl-pyridine (CAS: 3512-75- 2; 1.02 g, 7.20 mmol) in DMSO (14.5 mL) at rt. The mixture was stirred at 60 °C for 5 h. The residue was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo to yield intermediate 1 (2.31 g, 74%, 71 % purity) as a brown syrup, used in the next step without further purification.

Method 2: A solution of tert- butyl 4-hydroxypiperidine-l-carboxylate (CAS: 109384- 19-2; 11.82 g, 58.72 mmol) in DMF (20 mL) was added to a stirred suspension of sodium hydride (CAS: 7646-69-7; 60% dispersion in mineral oil, 2.58 g, 64.59 mmol) in DMF (90 mL) at 0 °C under N ₂ . The mixture was stirred for 2 h and then a solution of 4-chloro-2, 6-dimethyl-pyridine (CAS: 3512-75-2; 9.15 g, 64.59 mmol) in DMF (20 mL) was added dropwise at 0° C. The mixture was allowed to warm to rt and stirred for 3 days and then at 60 °C for 6 h. After cooling to rt, water was added and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (silica; EtOAc in heptane 30/70 to 100/0). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 1 as colourless oil (2.24 g, 12%) and impure fractions, that were further purified by flash chromatography (silica; 7N solution of NTb in MeOH in DCM, 0/100 to 10/90) and then by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 50 x 100 mm, 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 80% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 20% CH3CN to 0% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 100% CH3CN). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo to yield additional intermediate 1 as colourless oil (3.82 g, 21%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 2

Intermediate 2 was prepared following analogous procedures to Method 1 and Method 2 described for the synthesis of intermediate 1 using /e/t-butyl 4-hydroxypiperidine-l- carboxylate (CAS: 109384-19-2) and 4-chloro-2, 6-dimethyl-pyrimidine (CAS: 4472- 45-1) as starting materials.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 3

Intermediate 3 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 2 for the synthesis of intermediate 1 using tert- butyl 4-hydroxypiperidine-l- carboxylate (CAS: 109384-19-2) and 4-bromo-2-methoxy-6-methylpyridine (CAS: 1083169-00-9) as starting materials. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 4

Intermediate 4 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 2 for the synthesis of intermediate 1 using tert- butyl 4-hydroxypiperidine-l- carboxylate (CAS: 109384-19-2) and 2-chloro-4-iodo-6-(trifluoromethyl)pyridine (CAS: 205444-22-0) as starting materials.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 5

Pd(OAc) ₂ (CAS: 3375-31-3; 46.74 mg, 0.21 mmol) and tricyclohexylphosphonium tetrafluroborate (CAS: 58656-04-5; 153.33 mg, 0.42 mmol) were added to a stirred mixture of intermediate 4 (1.06 g, 2.78 mmol), trimethylboroxine (CAS: 823-96-1; 1.05 mL, 7.49 mmol) and K ₂ CO ₃ (0.77 g, 5.55 mmol) in deoxygenated l,4-dioxane (8.5 mL). The mixture was stirred at 100 °C for 4 h under N ₂ . After cooling to rt, the mixture was diluted with water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was separated, dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica; EtOAc in heptane 0/100 to 30/70). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 5 as brown oil (0.95 g, 95%). PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 6

Method 1 : Amberlyst® 15 hydrogen form, strongly acidic, cation exchanger resin (CAS: 39389-20-3, 7.78 g, loading 4.7 meq/g) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 1 (2.24 g, 7.31 mmol) in MeOH (59.3 mL) at rt. The mixture was shaked in a solid phase reactor at rt for 16 h. The resin was filtered and washed with MeOH (this fraction was discarded) and then with a 7N solution of N¾ in MeOH. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 6 as brown oil, that crystallized upon standing (1.46 g, 97%).

Method 2: Trifluoroacetic acid (CAS: 76-05-1, 5 mL, 65.34 mmol) was added dropwise to a stirred solution of intermediate 1 (2.2 g, 5.46 mmol) in l,4-dioxane (9.6 mL) at rt. The mixture was stirred at rt for 12 h and then evaporated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in MeOH and Amberlyst® 15 hydrogen form, strongly acidic, cation exchanger resin (CAS: 39389-20-3, 6.4 g, loading 4.7 meq/g) was added. The mixture was shaked in a solid phase reactor at rt for 3 h. The resin was filtered and washed with MeOH (this fraction was discarded) and then with a 7N solution of N¾ in MeOH. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 6 as orange oil (0.98 g, 87%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 7

Intermediate 7 was prepared following analogous procedures to Method 1 and Method 2 described for the synthesis of intermediate 6 using intermediate 2 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 8

Intermediate 8 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 1 for the synthesis of intermediate 6 using intermediate 3 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 9

Intermediate 9 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 1 for the synthesis of intermediate 6 using intermediate 5 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 40

l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 200 mg, 1.00 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (2 mL) was added dropwise to a stirred solution of NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 47.8 mg, 1.20 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (2 mL) at 0 °C. The mixture was stirred at 0 °C for 30 min and 3-chloro-6-(trifhroromethyl)pyridazine (CAS: 258506-68-2; 200 mg, 1.09 mmol) dissolved in anhydrous DMF (2 mL) was added portionwise at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 80 °C for 18 h and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was diluted with water and extracted with a mixture of DCM and EtOAc. The combined organic layers were dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 70:30). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 40 (202 mg, 59%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 41

HC1 (4M in l,4-dioxane, 1.61 mL, 6.45 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 40 (202 mg, 0.58 mmol) in l,4-dioxane (3.9 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 20 h. The solvent was evaporated in vacuo to afford intermediate 41 (157 mg, 95%) as a white solid and which was used in next step without further purification.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 42 Boc i-42

Intermediate 42 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 40 using l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2) and 6-chloropyridazine-3-carbonitrile (CAS: 35857-89-7) as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 40:60). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 42 (843 mg, 85%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 43

Intermediate 43 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 41 using intermediate 42as starting material. The crude product was used in the next step without any purification.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 44

Boc

1-44

To a solution of l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 500 mg, 2.48 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (9 mL) at room temperature was added NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oi, 119 mg, 2.98 mmol) portion wise. The mixture was stirred for 60 min and 2- chloro-6-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)pyridine (CAS: 22123-14-4; 534 mg, 2.73 mmol) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at 80 °C for 18 h. The mixture was cooled down and the volatiles were evaporated in vacuo. The residue was taken up in EtOAc and washed with NaHCCh (sat., aq.). The organic phase was evaporated in vacuo to give intermediate 44 (1.03 g, 77%, 67% purity) as a brown oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 45

A solution of intermediate 44 (1.49 g, 2.78 mmol, 67% purity) in MeOH (22.6 mL) was added to a solid phase reactor containing Amberlyst®l5 hydrogen form (CAS: 39389- 20-3; 2.96 g, 13.9 mmol). The mixture was shaken at room temperature for 16 h. The solvent was removed and the resin was washed with MeOH (3 times), filtered and the solvent was discarded. The product was eluted with NFT (7N in MeOH) (3 times) to afford intermediate 45 (684 mg, 68%, 72% purity) as a brown oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 46 Boc i-46

Intermediate 46 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 44 using l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2) and 6-chloro-3-pyridinecarbonitrile (CAS: 33252-28-7) as starting materials.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 47

Intermediate 47 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 45 using intermediate 46 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 48 A solution of l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 1.00 g, 4.97 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (4.16 mL) was added dropwise to a stirred solution of NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 238 mg, 5.96 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (4.16 mL) at 0 °C. The mixture was stirred at 0 °C for 30 min and a solution of 2-chloro-4,6-dimethylpyridine (CAS: 30838-93-8; 0.79 g, 5.47 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (4.16 mL) was added portionwise at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 60 °C for 16 h and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 70:30) to afford intermediate 48 (1.12 g, 74%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 49

A solution of intermediate 48 (1.12 g, 3.67 mmol) in MeOH (28.1 mL) was added to a closed reactor containing Amberlyst® 15 hydrogen form (CAS: 39389-20-3 3.89 g, 18.3 mmol). The mixture was shaken in a solid phase reactor at room temperature for 16 h. The resin was washed with MeOH (the fraction was discarded). NFL (7N in MeOH) (25 mL) was added. The mixture was shaken in the solid phase reactor for 2 h. The resin was filtered off and washed with NFL (7N in MeOH) (2 x 25 mL, 30 min shaken). The filtrates were concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 49 (763 mg, 87%, 86% purity) as a dark brown oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 50

Intermediate 50 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 48 using l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2) and 4-chloro-2-methoxypyridine (CAS: 72141-44-7) as starting materials. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 70:30) to afford intermediate 50 (900 mg, 59%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 51

Intermediate 51 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 49 using intermediate 50 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 52 Boc i-52

Intermediate 52 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 48 using l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2) and 2-chloronicotinonitrile (CAS: 6602-54-6) as starting materials.

The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 70:30) to afford intermediate 52 (1.1 g, 73%) as a yellow oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 53

Intermediate 53 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 49 using intermediate 52 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 54 Boc i-54 Intermediate 54 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 48 using l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2) and 4-chloro-pyridine-2-carbonitrile (CAS: 19235-89-3) as starting materials.

The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 70:30) to afford intermediate 54 (650 mg, 43%) as a yellow oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 55

Intermediate 55 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 46 using intermediate 54 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 56 Boc 1-56

Intermediate 56 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 48 using l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2) and 2,3,5-trifluoropyridine (CAS: 76469-41-5) as starting materials.

The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 70:30) to afford intermediate 56 (580 mg, 37%) as a colourless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 57

Intermediate 57 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 49 using intermediate 56 as starting material. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 58 Boc i-58

To a solution of l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 250 mg, 1.24 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (4.2 mL) under N ₂ atmosphere were added NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 59.6 mg, 1.49 mmol) and l5-crown-5 (248 pL, 1.49 mmol). 3-Chloro-2,5- dimethylpyrazine (CAS: 95-89-6; 165 pL, 1.37 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at 80 °C. The mixture was diluted with water at 0 °C and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried, filtered and the solvents were concentrated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 40:60) to afford intermediate 58 (256 mg, 67%) a colourless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 59

HC1 (4M in l,4-dioxane, 2.50 mL, 10.0 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 58 (256 mg, 0.83 mmol) in l,4-dioxane (7.1 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 20 h. Then solvent was concentrated in vacuo to give intermediate 59 (195 mg, 96%) which was used as such in the next step.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 60

Intermediate 60 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 58 using l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2) and 3-chloro-4,6-dimethylpyridazine (CAS: 17258-26-3) as starting materials.

The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 40:60) to afford intermediate 60 (302 mg, 79%) as a yellow oil. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 61

Intermediate 61 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 59 using intermediate 60 as starting material. The hydrochloride salt was used in the next step without any purification.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 62

Boc 1-62

Intermediate 62 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 58 using l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2) and 2,6-dimethyl-pyridin-4-ylmethyl chloride (CAS: 120739-87-9) as starting materials. The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: (NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in wateryCTECN, gradient from 67:33 to 50:50) to afford intermediate 62 (81.5 mg, 16%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 63

HC1 (4M in l,4-dioxane, 0.64 mL, 2.54 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 62 (81.5 mg, 0.25 mmol) in l,4-dioxane (1.99 mL) in a sealed tube. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 h and concentrated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by ion exchange chromatography using an Isolute SCX-2 cartridge. The product was eluted with MeOH, then with NH3 (7N in MeOH). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0/100 to 10/90). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo to give intermediate 63 (57.6 mg) as a yellow oil.

The product was converted into the corresponding -2HC1 salt by stirring intermediate 63 in l,4-dioxane in the presence of HC1 at Rt for 1 h. The resulting precipitate was filtered, and the filtered cake was dried under vacuum giving intermediate -2HC1 as a yellow solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 64 Boc 1-64

To a mixture of NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 1.75 g, 45.7 mmol) in DMF (30 mL) was added l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 5.41 g, 26.9 mmol) portionwise. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 10 min, and 2-bromo-3- methylpyridine (CAS: 3430-17-9; 1.5 mL, 13.4 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was heated in the microwave at 150 °C for 10 min. the mixture was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM/MeOH-NTb, 95 :5) to afford intermediate 64 (2.18 g, 55%). PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 65

Intermediate 64 (2.18 g, 7.46 mmol) was dissolved in DCM (75 mL) and TFA (10 mL) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h, and the solvent was removed in vacuo. The crude mixture was dissolved in DCM, washed with NaHC0 ₃ (sat. aq.), brine, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford a first fraction of intermediate 65 (517 mg, 36%). The aqueous phase was extracted with a mixture of EtOAc and THF to afford a second fraction of intermediate 65 (525 mg, 37%). PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 66 Boc i-66

A solution of l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 1.00 g, 4.97 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (7 mL) was added dropwise to a stirred solution ofNaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 238 mg, 5.96 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (7 mL) at 0 °C. The mixture was stirred at 0 °C for 30 min and 4-chloro-2-methylpyridine (CAS: 3678-63-5; 697 mg, 5.47 mmol) dissolved in anhydrous DMF (3 mL) was added dropwise at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 60 °C for 16 h, then at 140 °C for 45 min under microwave irradiation The mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was diluted with water. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM/MeOH, gradient from 100:0 to 70:70) to afford intermediate 66 (261 mg, 18%) as a colorless oil. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 67

HC1 (4M in l,4-dioxane, 5.34 mL, 21.4 mmol) was added to intermediate 66 (261 mg, 0.89 mmol) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 18 h and the volatiles were evaporated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in MeOH and passed through an Isolute SCX-2 cartridge. The product was eluted with NLL (7N in MeOH) to afford intermediate 67 (170 mg, 99%) as a colorless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 68

To a solution of l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 1.00 g, 4.97 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (3.86 mL) at room temperature was added NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 238 mg, 5.96 mmol) portion wise. The mixture was stirred for 1.5 h. 2- Chloro-6-methylpyridine (CAS: 18368-63-3; 697 mg, 5.47 mmol) was added and the mixture was heated at 140 °C for 45 min under microwave irradiation. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in MeOH and passed through an Iso lute SCX-2 cartridge. The product was eluted with NFT (7N in MeOH) to afford intermediate 68 (449 mg, 31%) as a pale brown oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 69

Intermediate 69 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 67 using intermediate 68 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 70

N-Boc-4-piperidinemethanol (CAS: 123855-51-6; 46.0 g, 214 mmol), triphenylphosphine (92.0 g, 351 mmol) and DIAD (CAS: 1972-28-7; 61.0 g, 350 mmol) were dissolved in THF (1.0 L). The mixture was cooled to 0 °C and 2-hydroxy-5-

(trifluoromethyl)pyridine (CAS: 33252-63-0; 35.0 g, 215 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 h and evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, petroleum ether/EtOAc, gradient from 50: 1 to 5: 1) to afford intermediate 70 (42 g, 55%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 71

Intermediate 70 (42.0 g, 117 mmol) was added into HC1 (4M in MeOH, 300 mL, 1.20 mol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 71 (26.55 g). PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 72 Boc i-72

Triphenylphosphine (619 mg, 2.36 mmol) was added to a mixture of 2-methylpyrimidin- 5-ol (CAS: 35231-56-2; 200 mg, 1.82 mmol), l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 366 mg, 1.82 mmol) and DBAD (CAS: 870-50-8; 544 mg, 2.36 mmol) in THF (4 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 h and concentrated to dryness. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 80:20) to afford intermediate 72 (893 mg, 80%, 48% purity) as a white solid. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 73

HC1 (4M in l,4-dioxane, 4.38 mL, 17.5 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 72 (893 mg, 1.46 mmol, 48% purity) in l,4-dioxane (12.5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h and the solvent was concentrated in vacuo. A solution of the residue in MeOH (4.5 mL) was added to a closed reactor containing Amberlyst®l5 hydrogen form (CAS: 39389-20-3; 1.55 g, 7.31 mmol). The mixture was shaken in a solid phase reactor at room temperature for l6h. The resin was washed with MeOH. NFT (7N in MeOH) was added and the mixture was shaken in the solid phase reactor for 2 h. The resin was filtered off and washed with NFT (7N in MeOH). The filtrates were combined and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 73 (246 mg, 87%) as a yellow oil. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 74

DBAD (CAS: 870-50-8; 1.72 g, 7.45 mmol) was added to a stirred mixture of l-Boc-4- hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 1.00 g, 4.97 mmol), 5-fluoropyridin-3-ol (CAS: 209328-55-2; 618 mg, 5.47 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (1.96 g, 7.45 mmol) in THF

(12.1 mL) at 0 °C in a sealed tube and under N ₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc and washed with NaOH (5N). The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified twice by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 70:30) to afford intermediate 74 (890 mg, 60%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 75

A solution of intermediate 74 (0.89 g, 3.00 mmol) in MeOH (23 mL) was added to a closed reactor containing Amberlyst®l5 hydrogen form (CAS: 39389-20-3; 3.2 g, 15.0 mmol). The mixture was shaken in a solid phase reactor at room temperature for 16 h. The resin was washed with MeOH (the fraction was discarded), then NFT (7N solution in MeOH) (23 ml) was added. The mixture was shaken in the solid phase reactor for 2 h. The resin was filtered and washed with NFT (7N solution in MeOH) (3 x 23 mL; 30 min shaken). The filtrates were concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 75 (550 mg, 93%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATES 76 and 77

A suspension of 2, 6-dimethylpyridin-4-ol (CAS: 13603-44-6; 1.00 g, 8.12 mmol) andN- chlorosuccinimide (1.46 g, 10.9 mmol) in a mixture of MeOH (10 ml) and DCM (25 ml) was stirred under inert atmosphere at room temperature overnight. The precipitate was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated to dryness. The residue was triturated with CH ₃ CN. The precipitate was filtered, washed with CH ₃ CN, and dried under vacuum to yield a mixture of intermediates 76 and 77 (940 mg ,73%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 78

DBAD (CAS: 870-50-8; 1.52 g, 6.60 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediates 76 and 77 (800 mg, 5.08 mmol), l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 1.33 g, 6.60 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (1.73 g, 6.60 mmol) in toluene (16 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h and at 85 °C for 1 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated to dryness and the residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 70:30). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 78 (3.7 g, 77%, 36% purity).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 79

Intermediate 79 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 67 using intermediate 78 as starting material.

The residue was purified by ion exchange chromatography using an Isolute SCX-2 cartridge. The product was eluted with MeOH, then with NH3 (7N in MeOH). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo to afford intermediate 79 (0.90 g, 96%) as a colorless oil which solidified upon standing. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 80 Boc i-80

Intermediate 80 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 78 using in l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19- 2) and 2-chloropyrimidine-5-ol (CAS: 4983-28-2) as starting materials.

The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 70:30) to afford intermediate 80 (2.3 g, 96%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 81

HC1 (4M in l,4-dioxane, 12.1 mL, 48.4 mmol) was added to intermediate 80 (1.90 g,

6.06 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated to dryness. The residue was suspended in DCM and basified with NH ₄ OH. The organic layer was separated and the aqueous layer was further extracted with DCM. The combined organic layers were dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to give intermediate 81 (1.28 g, 99%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 82

DBAD (CAS: 870-50-8; 642 mg, 2.79 mmol) was added to a solution of 6- (trifluoromethyl)pyridine-3-ol (CAS: 216766-12-0; 350 mg, 2.15 mmol), l-Boc-4- hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 561 mg, 2.79 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (732 mg, 2.79 mmol) in THF (3.5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 h and concentrated to dryness. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 85: 15) to afford intermediate 82 (580 mg, 78%) as a white solid. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 83

Intermediate 83 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 81 using intermediate 82 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 84 Boc i-84

Intermediate 84 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 82 using l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2) and 6-chloro-5-fluoropyridin-3-ol (CAS: 870062-76-3) as starting materials.

The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 85:15) to afford intermediate 84 (880 mg, 78%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 85

Intermediate 85 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 81 using intermediate 84 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 86

To a mixture of NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 162 mg, 4.05 mmol) in DMF (6 mL) at 0 °C was added l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 326 mg, 1.62 mmol) and l5-crown-5 (270 uL, 1.62 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 30 min and 4- bromo-2-(difluoromethyl)-6-methylpyridine (CAS: 1226800-12-9; 300 mg, 1.35 mmol) was added slowly. The reaction mixture was stirred at 70 °C for 18 h, cooled to 0 °C and quenched with water. The product was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 50:50) to afford intermediate 86 (435 mg, 94%) as a colourless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 87

HC1 (4M inl,4-dioxane, 8.6 mL, 35.0 mmol) was added to intermediate 86 (435 mg, 1.27 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated to dryness. The residue was purified by ion exchange chromatography using an Isolute SCX-2 cartridge. The product was eluted with MaOH, then with NEE (7M in MeOH). The desired fraction were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 87 (300 mg, 97%) as a colorless oil. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 88 Boc i-88

To a stirred mixture of l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 3.00 g, 3.70 mmol), 5-hydroxy-2-methylpyridine (CAS: 1121-78-4; 0.41 g, 3.70 mmol), triphenylphosphine polymer bound (1.88 mmol/g, 3.63 g, 6.80 mmol) and THF (48 mL) cooled with an ice-water bath was added dropwise DIAD (CAS: 2446-83-5; 1.38 mL, 7.00 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred in a microwave at 120 °C for 20 min. The mixture was filtered over C elite® and the filtrate was evaporated till dryness in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM/MeOH, gradient from 100:0 to 96:4) to afford intermediate 88 (3.53 g, 81%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 89 A mixture of intermediate 88 (3.67 g, 12.6 mmol) and TFA (21 mL) in CHCb (95 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was treated with water and DCM. The aqueous layer was separated and basified with NaOH (50%, aq.). The aqueous phase was extracted with DCM, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo to dryness to afford intermediate (2.01 g, 83%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 90 Boc i-90

To a stirred mixture of NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 1.96 g, 49.1 mmol) in DME (57 mL) was added l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 5.81 g, 28.9 mmol) portionwise. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h, and 2-bromo-4- methylpyridine (CAS: 4926-28-7; 1.60 mL, 14.4 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred under reflux for 4 days. The mixture was cooled down and carefully treated with water. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were dried (Na2S04), filtered and evaporated to dryness in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM/MeOH, gradient from 100:0 to 96:4) to afford intermediate 90 (2.74 g, 65%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 91

Intermediate 91 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 89 using intermediate 90 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 92

To a mixture ofN-Boc-4-piperidinemethanol (CAS: 123855-51-6; 6.94 g, 32.3 mmol) in DMF (40 ml) was added NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 1.42 g, 34.5 mmol) portionwise under N ₂ atmosphere. The mixture was stirred at 80 °C for 30 min, and a solution of 4-bromo-2,6-dimethylpyridine (CAS: 5093-70-9; 3.00 g, 16.1 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at 80 °C overnight. Water (50 mL) was added and the mixture was extracted with DCM (5 x 200 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine (5 x 50 mL), dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, petroleum ether/EtOAC, gradient from 100:0 to 2: 1). The pure fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to afford intermediate 92 (1.2 g, 23%) as a yellow oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 93

A mixture of intermediate 92 (1.20 g, 3.75 mmol) in HC1 (4M in l,4-dioxane, 20 mL, 80 mmol) was stirred at 25 °C for 1 h and concentrated in vacuo to afford a yellow solid which was triturated with tert- butyl methyl ether (2 x 20 mL) to give intermediate 93 (1.0 g, 91%). .

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 94 Boc 1-94

NaO/Bu (4.78 g, 49.7 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of l-Boc-4- hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 5.00 g, 24.8 mmol) and 2-chloro-5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridine (4.51 g, 24.8 mmol) in DMSO (28 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 h and diluted with water. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo to afford intermediate 94 (8.28 g, 96%) as a solid which was used in the next step without further purification. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 95

TFA (18.4 mL, 239 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 94 (8.28 g, 23.9 mmol) in DCM (83 mL) at 0 °C. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was diluted with water and basified with 10% NaOH. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM/MeOH, gradient from 100:0 to 80:20). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 95 (3.27 g, 38%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 96 Boc i-96

Intermediate 96 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 94 using l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2) and 2-chloro-6-methylpyrazine (CAS: 38557-71-0) as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 50:50) to afford intermediate 96 (2.25 g, 82%) as a yellow oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 97

A solution of intermediate 96 (2.25 g, 7.67 mmol) in MeOH (62.2 mL) was added to a solid phase reactor containing Amberlyst®l5 hydrogen form (CAS: 39389-20-3; 8.16 g, 38.3 mmol). The mixture was shaken at room temperature for 16 h. The solvent was removed and the resin was washed with MeOH (x 3), filtered and the solvent was discarded. The product was eluted with NH3 (7N in MeOH) (x 3). The filtrates were combined and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 97 (1.40 g, 95%) as a yellow oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 98 Boc i-98

Intermediate 98 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 94 using l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2) and 3-chloro-5-methylpyridazine (CAS: 89283-31-8) as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 50:50) to afford intermediate 98 (0.77 g, 51%) as a yellow oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 99

Intermediate 99 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 97 using intermediate 98 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 100

A solution of 4-amino- l-Boc-piperidine (CAS: 5399-92-8; 2.00 g, 9.98 mmol), 4-bromo- 2,6-dimethylpyridine (CAS: 5093-70-9; 1.86 g, 9.88 mmol), Pd ₂ dba3 (183 mg, 0.2 mmol) and XPhos (143 mg, 0.3 mmol) in toluene (8 mL) was degassed. /BuOK (2.24 g, 20 mmol) was added. The reaction vessel was sealed and heated at 120 °C for 14 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and filtered through Celite®. The mixture was washed with EtOAc. The filtrate was evaporated in vacuo and the crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NFT (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 90:10). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo. A second purification was performed by flash column chromatography (silica, NH3 (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 98:2). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 100 (352 mg, 12%) as a yellow oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 101

-101

Intermediate 101 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 97 using intermediate 100 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 102

102

/BuOK (261 mg, 2.32 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of (3S,4R)-4-hydroxy-3- methylpiperidine-l-carboxylate (CAS: 955028-93-0; 250 mg, 1.16 mmol) in DMSO (3.1 mL) at room temperature, followed by the addition of 4-chloro-2,6-dimethylpyridine (CAS: 3512-75-2; 164 mg, 1.16 mmol) in a microwave vial under N ₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at 60 °C for 18 h. The mixture was cooled down to room temperature, treated with water and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to afford intermediate 102 which was used as such in the next step.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 103

-103

The resin Amberlyst®l5 hydrogen form (CAS: 39389-20-3; 4.11 mmol/g) was added to intermediate 102 in MeOH (62 mL). The reaction was shaken for 24 h. The solvent was removed and discarded. The resin was washed few times with MeOH. Then NTb (7N in MeOH) was added to the resin and the mixture was shaken for 4 h. The solvent was removed and the resin was washed few times with NTb (7N in MeOH). The organic solvent was evaporated in vacuo to afford intermediate 103 (240 mg).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 104

Boc

1-104

NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 46 mg, .1.19 mmol) was added portionwise to a stirred solution of l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 200 mg, 0.99 mmol) in DMF (3 mL) in a sealed tube and under N ₂ at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0 °C for 30 min and a solution of 4-chloro-2-(trifluoromethyl)pyridine (CAS: 131748- 14-6; 271 mg, 1.49 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) was added dropwise at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 60 °C for 48 h. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 50:50). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 104 (212 mg, 62%) as colorless oil which solidified to a white solid upon standing. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 105

A solution of intermediate 104 (212 mg, 0.61 mmol) in MeOH (5 mL) was added to a solid phase reactor containing Amberlyst®l5 hydrogen form (CAS: 39389-20-3; 0.65 g, 3.06 mmol). The mixture was shaken at room temperature for 16 h. The solvent was removed and the resin was washed with MeOH (3 times), filtered and the solvent discarded. The product was eluted with NTb (7N in MeOH) (3 times). The solvent was evaporated in vacuo to afford intermediate 105 (144 mg, 95%) as a brown oil. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 106 -106

NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 0.24 g, 5.96 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 1.00 g, 4.97 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (6.25 mL) at 0 °C. The mixture was stirred at 0 °C for 30 min, and 3-bromo-5- fluoropyridine (CAS: 407-20-5; 0.98 g, 5.47 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (6.25 mL) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 70:30) to afford intermediate 106 (1.08 g, 61%) as a white sticky solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 107 -107

Pd(OAc) ₂ (23.6 mg, 0.11 mmol) and tricyclohexylphosphine tetrafluoroborate (77.3 mg, 0.21 mmol) were added to a stirred mixture of intermediate 106 (500 mg, 1.40 mmol), trimehtylboroxine (0.53 mL, 3.78 mmol) and K ₂ C0 ₃ (387 mg, 2.80 mmol) in degassed l,4-dioxane (4.3 mL) in a sealed tube. The mixture was purged with N2 for 5 min and stirred at 100 °C for 16 h under N ₂ atmosphere. The mixture was cooled down, washed with H20 and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in MeOH and passed through an Isolute SCX-2 cartridge. The product was eluted with NFT (7N in MeOH) to afford intermediate 107 (420 mg, 74%, 72% purity) as a colorless oil. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 108 -108 HC1 (4M in l,4-dioxane, 6.2 mL, 24.7 mmol) was added to intermediate 107 (420 mg, 1.03 mmol, 72% purity). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 h. The volatiles were evaporated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in MeOH and passed through an Isolute SCX-2 cartridge. The product was eluted with NFT (7N in MeOH) to afford intermediate 108 (298 mg, 72%, 48% purity) as a colorless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 109

-109

ft-BuLi (2.5 M in hexane, 3.67 mL, 9.16 mmol) was added to a mixture of 4-bromo-2,6- dimethylpyridine (CAS: 5093-70-9; 1.55 g, 8.33 mmol) in THF (25 ml) at -78 °C under N ₂ atmosphere. The mixture was stirred at -78 °C for 30 min and then a solution of tert- butyl 4-(methoxy(methyl)carbamoyl)piperidine-l-carboxylate (CAS: 139290-70-3; 2.50 g, 9.16 mmol) in THF (5 ml) was added at -78 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at - 78 °C for 1 h. NH ₄ Cl (sat., aq.) was added and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc (2 x 10 mL). The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 80:20). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 109 (1.44 g, 54%) as a yellow oil that solidified upon standing.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 110

-110

LiHMDS (1M solution, 4.98 mL, 7.98 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 109 (1.44 g, 4.52 mmol) in THF (111 ml), at -78 °C. The mixture was stirred at -10 °C for 1 h and the mixture was cooled down to -78 °C. A solution of N- benzenfluorosulfonamide (CAS: 133745-75-2; 1.57 g, 4.98 mmol) in THF (12.3 mL) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at -78 °C for 1 h, and at -50 °C for 2 h. NH4CI (sat., aq.) was added and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM/MeOH, gradient from 100:0 to 93:7, then heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 0:100). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 110 (963 mg, 41%, 65% purity) as a yellow oil that solidified upon standing.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 111

NaBEE (0.13 g, 3.44 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 110 (963 mg, 2.86 mmol, 65% purity) in MeOH (19.3 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h and quenched with NaOH (1 M) (2 mL). The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (2 x 30 mL). The combined organic layers were dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 111 (1.07 g, 81%, 73% purity).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 112

Boc 1-112

O-Phenyl chlorothionoformate (CAS: 1005-56-7; 1.43 g, 8.27 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 111 (1.40 g, 4.14 mmol, 73% purity) and DMAP (75.8 mg, 0.62 mmol) in DCM (33.6 mL). Et ₃ N (1.44 mL, 10.3 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 72 h. NH ₄ Cl (sat., aq.) was added and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 100:0, then MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 15:85). The desired fractions were collected concentrated in vacuo to give intermediate 112 (623 mg, 32%) as a light yellow foam.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 113 -113

Tributyltin hydride (CAS: 688-73-3; 1.07 mL, 3.98 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 112 (630 mg, 1.33 mmol) and AIBN (CAS: 78-67-1; 21.8 mg, 0.13 mmol) in toluene (19 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 1 10 °C for 2 h. The mixture was cooled down and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/DCM, gradient from 100:0 to 0: 100, then DCM/MeOH, gradient from 100:0 to 85 : 15). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 113 (457 mg, 88%, 82% purity) as a light yellow oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 114

TFA (0.92 mL, 11.9 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 113 (457 mg, 1.42 mmol, 82% purity) in DCM (2.3 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo.

A fraction of the residue (150 mg) was neutralized with NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.) and extracted with DCM (2 x 10 mL) and with MeOH and DCM (2:8). The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 114 (100 mg) as an orange oil which was used in the next step without further purification.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 115 -115 Ti(0-iPr) ₄ (13.4 mL, 45.4 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of 4 -{tert- butyldimethylsiloxy)piperidine (CAS: 97231-91-9; 6.52 g, 30.3 mmol) and 2,3-dihydro- [l,4]dioxino[2,3-b]pyridine-6-carbaldehyde (CAS: 615568-24-6; 5.00 g, 30.3 mmol) in anhydrous DCM (170 mL) at room temperature and under N ₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred for 20 h, cooled to 0 °C and methylmagnesium bromide (3.2M in Me-THF, 28.4 mL, 90.8 mmol) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at this temperature for 15 min and at room temperature for 1 h. NTLCl (40 mL) was added and the mixture was cooled with an ice bath. A yellow solid formed and the mixture was diluted with water (500 mL). The mixture was extracted with DCM (2 x 200 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (4 x 100 mL), dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NFL (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 2:98). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo to afford 2 fractions of intermediate 115 (fraction A: 1.42 g, 12%, 98% purity; and fraction B: 6.83 g, 55%, 92% purity) as orange oils.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATES 116, 117 AND 118

TBAF (1M solution, 28.1 mL, 28.1 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 115 (8.25 g, 20.1 mmol, 92% purity) in anhydrous THF (207 mL) at 0 °C under N ₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 20 h. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NFL (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 5:95) to afford intermediate 116 (3.0 g, 57%) as an orange solid. A purification of intermediate 116 (1.27 g) was performed via chiral SFC (stationary phase: CHIRACEL OJ-H 5pm 250*30mm, mobile phase: 90% C0 ₂ , 10% MeOH (0.9% i-PrNH ₂ )) delivered intermediate 117 (593 mg) and intermediate 118 (593 mg).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 119 119

A mixture of 4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 5382-16-20; 4.65 g, 45.9 mmol) and K ₂ CO ₃ (9.53 g, 68.9 mmol) in CH ₃ CN (100 mL) was stirred at 25 °C under N ₂ atmosphere for 10 min. Intermediate 20 (5.00 g, 22.9 mmol) was added dropwise and the reaction mixture was stirred at 80 °C under N ₂ atmosphere overnight. The mixture was evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was combined with another fraction (11.5 mmol) and purified by flash column chromatography (silica, petroleum ether/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 3: 1) to afford intermediate 119 (8.05 g, 80%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 120

To a mixture of l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2, 200 mg, 0.99 mmol) in DMF (3.847 mL), were added NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 79.5 mg, 1.99 mmol) and l5-crown-5 (198.4 mE, 1.19 mmol). Then 6-chloro-2,3-dimethylpyridine (154.78 mg, 1.09 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at 80 °C for 16 h. Then additional NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 39.75 mg, 0.99 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at 80 °C for 20 h. Then water was added at 0 °C and the mixture was extracted with DCM. The organic layer was separated, dried, filtered and the solvents concentrated in vacuo. The crude was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in heptane 0/100 to 70/30). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents concentrated in vacuo to give intermediate 120 (134.1 mg, 44%) as a colourless oil. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 121 . HC1

Intermediate 121 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 59.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 148 Boc 1- 148

A solution of chlorotrimethylsilane (1.25 mL, 9.85 mmol) and l-bromo-2-chloroethane (0.2 mL, 2.41 mmol) in THF (10 mL) was prepared under N ₂ atmosphere in a dried flask and was passed through a column containing Zn (10 g) using a syringe pump at 40°C and at a flow rate of lmL/min. A solution of l-Boc-4-iodomethylpiperidine (CAS: 145508- 94-7; 1.00 g, 3.08 mmol) in THF (10 mL) was passed through the column containing activated Zn using a syringe pump at 40 °C and at a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min. The outcoming solution was collected in a closed flask under N ₂ atmosphere. Titration with I ₂ revealed that a 0.2M solution was obtained which was used as such in the next step.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 149

PdCl ₂ (dppf)*DCM (94.5 mg, 0.12 mmol) and Cul (21.9 mg, 0.12 mmol) were added to a stirred solution of 4-bromo-2,6-dimethylpyridine (CAS: 5093-70-9; 215 mg, 1.15 mmol) in DMA (5 mL) at room temperature under N ₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was bubbled with N ₂ for 10 min. Then, intermediate 148 (0.2M solution, 586 mg, 1.5 mmol) was added to the stirred suspension under N ₂ atmosphere at room temperature. The reaction mixture was bubbled with N ₂ for 10 min and stirred at 80 °C for 16 h. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 80:20). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 149 (220 mg, 63%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 150 150

TFA (1.07 mL, 14.4 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 149 (220 mg, 0.72 mmol) in DCM (3.69 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in MeOH and Amberlyst®A26 hydroxide form (CAS: 39389-850; 226 mg, 0.72 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 45 min. The reaction was filtered and washed with MeOH (several times). The filtrates were evaporated in vacuo to afford intermediate 150 (148 mg, 99%) as a red foamy solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 151 Boc 1- 151

NaH (60% in mineral oil, 103 mg, 2.57 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of l-Boc- 4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 470 mg, 2.33 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) at 0 °C under N ₂ atmosphere. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. 2-Chloro-5- methylpyrazine (CAS: 59303-10-5; 300 mg, 2.33 mmol) was added to the mixture under N ₂ atmosphere and the reaction mixture was stirred at 50 °C for 16 h. A solution of 1- Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2) in DMF which was stirred for 1 h at room temperature was added, and the reaction mixture was stirred at 80 °C for another 16 h. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 80:20). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 151 (320 mg, 47%) as a white solid. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 152 -152

Intermediate 151 (320 mg, 1.09 mmol) was dissolved in HC1 (4M in l,4-dioxane, 4.0 mL, 16.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH:NH3 in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 10:90). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give intermediate 152 (189 mg, 87%) as a white solid. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 153 -153

l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 3.27 g, 15.8 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 661 mg, 16.5 mmol) in anhydrous THF (20 mL) at 0 °C under N ₂ atmosphere. The mixture was warmed to room temperature and stirred for 30 min. Then, 4-nitro-2,6-dichloropyridine (CAS: 25194-01- 8; 2.90 g, 15.0 mmol) was added to the mixture at 0 °C and the reaction mixture was stirred at 50 °C for 2 h. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 80:20). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give intermediate 153 (4.2 g, 80%) as a pale yellow solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 154 -154

Methylmagnesium bromide (1.4M solution, 11.7 mL, 16.4 mmol) was added dropwise to a stirred mixture of intermediate 153 (4.20 g, 11.7 mmol) and iron(III)acetylacetonate (125 mg, 0.35 mmol) in anhydrous THF (58 mL) and anhydrous NMP (11.5 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 10 °C for 1 h, diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 80:20). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give intermediate 154 (3.08 g, 79%) as colorless solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 155

Intermediate 154 (150 mg, 0.46 mmol), cyclopropylboronic acid (80.5 mg, 0.92 mmol) and tricyclohexylphosphine (11.5 mg, 40.8 nmol) were added to a stirred solution of K3PO4 (305 mg, 1.44 mmol) in toluene (4.88 mL) and H ₂ 0 (0.57 mL) under N ₂ atmosphere. Then Pd(OAc) ₂ (4.53 mg, 20.2 nmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 105 °C for 16 h. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 50:50) The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 155 (150 mg, 97%) as a colorless sticky solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 156

-156

TFA (0.77 mL, 10.4 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 155 (172.8 mg, 0.52 mmol) in DCM (2.66 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 h and the solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in MeOH and Amberlyst® A26 hydroxide form (CAS: 39389-85-0; 650 mg, 2.08 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 45 min, filtered and washed with MeOH several times. The filtrate was evaporated in vacuo to afford intermediate 156 (134 mg, quant., 90% purity) as a beige foamy solid. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 157

Boc

1-157

A solution of sodium (52.8 mg, 2.30 mmol) in EtOH (2.5 mL) under N ₂ atmosphere was added dropwise to a solution of intermediate 154 (500 mg, 1.53 mmol) in EtOH (1 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 16 h, diluted with NH ₄ Cl and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtAOc, gradient from 100:0 to 90: 10). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 157 (224 mg, 44%) as a yellow oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 158 -158

Intermediate 157 (224 mg, 0.67 mmol) was dissolved in HC1 (4M in l,4-dioxane, 0.83 mL, 3.33 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in MeOH (1 mL) and Amberlyst® A26 hydroxide form (CAS: 39339-85-0; 888 mg, 2.66 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature until pH 7. The resin was removed by filtration and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH:NH3 in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 100:0). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give intermediate 158 (104 mg, 66%) as a colourless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 159 -159

Dppf (71.2 mg, 0.13 mmol) and Pd ₂ dba3 (59.2 mg, 62.7 pmol) were added to DMA (22 mL) while the solvent was degassed with N ₂ at 45 °C. The mixture was stirred under N ₂ atmosphere at 45 °C for 5 min. Zn (16.7 mg, 0.25 mmol) and Zinc cyanide (84.2 mg, 0.70 mmol) were added under N ₂ at 45 °C. Intermediate 154 (410 mg, 1.26 mmol) was added under N ₂ at 45 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred in a sealed tube at 120 °C for 16 h The mixture was cooled down, diluted with NaHCOs (sat., aq.) and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with water, dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 85:15). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 159 (399 mg, 99%) as a pink solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 160 -160

Intermediate 160 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 156 using intermediate 159 as starting material. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 161 Boc 1-161

Pd ₂ dba ₃ (79.8 mg, 87.2 pmol) was added to a solution of Cs ₂ C0 ₃ (1.71 g, 5.23 mmol) and XPhos (101 mg, 0.17 mmol) in toluene (26 mL) while N ₂ was bubbling and the mixture was stirred at 40 °C for 2 min. tert- Butyl 4-amino- l-piperidinecarboxylate (CAS: 87120-72-7; 349 mg, 1.74 mmol) was added while N ₂ was bubbling. The mixture was stirred at 40 °C for 5 min and 5-bromo-2-methylpyridine (CAS: 3430-13-5; 300 mg, 1.74 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 105 °C for 18 h. Water was added and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc (3 times). The combined organic layers were dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 50:50). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give intermediate 161 (409 mg, 80%) as a white solid. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 162 162

Intermediate 162 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 156 using intermediate 161 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 163 Boc 1-163

Intermediate 163 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 161 using 5-bromo-2-methylpyrimidine (CAS: 7752- 78-5) and /e/ -butyl 4-amino- l-piperidinecarboxylate (CAS: 87120-72-7) as starting materials.

The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in heptane, gradient from 0: 100 to 50:50). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 163 (621 mg, 73%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 164 -164

Intermediate 164 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 156 using intermediate 163 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 165 -165

Pd(dppf)Cl ₂ *DCM (60.0 mg, 73.4 umol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 154 (400 mg, 1.22 mmol), potassium trifluoro(prop-l-en-2-yl)borate (CAS: 395083-14-4; 272 mg, 1.84 mmol) and CS ₂ CO ₃ (1.40 g, 2.94 mmol) in H ₂ 0 (1.12 mL) and 1 ,4-dioxane (9 mL) at room temperature while N ₂ was bubbling. The reaction mixture was stirred at

90 °C in a sealed tube for 48 h. Water was added and the mixture was extracted with

EtOAc (3 times). The combined organic extracts were dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was removed in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 85:15). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give intermediate 165 (383 mg, 94%) as a colorless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 166 166

Pd/C (123 mg, 0.12 mmol, 10% purity) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 165 (383 mg, 1.15 mmol) in MeOH (7.5 mL) at room temperature under N ₂ atmosphere. The mixture was purged with H ₂ and stirred at room temperature for 4 h under H ₂ atmosphere. The mixture was filtered over Celite®. The filtrate was extracted with EtOAc and MeOH and the solvent was removed in vacuo to afford intermediate 166 (381 mg, 99%) as a black oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 167 -167

TFA (0.51 mL, 6.84 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 166 (381 mg, 0.34 mmol, 30% purity) in DCM (1.75 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 h and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo. Amberlyst®A26 hydroxide form (CAS: 39339-85-0; 1.03 g, 3.3 mmol) was added to a solution of the residue (355 mg) in MeOH (2 mL) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature until the pH of the mixture was basic (2 h). The mixture was filtered and washed with MeOH. The solvent was removed in vacuo to afford intermediate 167 which was used as such in next step. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 168

Boc 1- 168

NaH (60% in mineral oil, 87.7 mg, 2.19 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of l-Boc- 4-hydroxypiperidine (442 mg, 2.19 mmol) in anhydrous THF 1.58 mL) at 0 °C and the mixture was stirred for 10 min at 0°C and 20 min at room temperature. 4-(Bromoethyl)- 2-methoxy-6-methylpyridine (158 mg, 0.73 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 16 h at room temperature. The solvent was removed in vacuo. Water was added to the residue and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was removed in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in heptane, gradient from 0/100 to 50/50). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give intermediate 168 (170 mg, 69%) as a colorless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 169

-169

Intermediate 169 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 167 using intermediate 168 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 170 Boc I- 17Q

NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 233 mg, 1.94 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (1.17 g, 5.83 mmol) in anhydrous THF (4 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 10 min at 0 °C and 20 min at room temperature. 5- (bromomethyl)-2-methylpyridine (CAS: 792187-67-8; 362 mg, 1.94 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 18 h at 60 °C. The solvent was removed in vacuo. Water was added and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in heptane, gradient from 0/100 to 80/20). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 170 (106 mg, 18%) as a colorless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 171 -171

Intermediate 171 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 167 using intermediate 170 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 172 Boc 1-172

Intermediate 172 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 170 using l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine and 5- bromomethyl-2-methyl-pyrimidine as starting materials.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 173 -173

Intermediate 173 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 167 using intermediate 172 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 174 Boc 1- 174 NaH (60% in mineral oil, 1.27 g, 31.8 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of 4- fluorophenol (1.00 g, 8.92 mmol) in anhydrous THF (30 mL) at room temperature and the mixture was stirred for 3 h. l-Boc-4-piperidone (CAS: 79099-07-3; 4.68 g, 23.5 mmol) was added. The mixture was cooled to 0 °C and anhydrous CHCh (2.82 mL) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0 °C for 1 h, then at 40 °C for 3 h.

The mixture was cooled to room temperature and was stirred for 48 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo. The mixture was suspended in water (30 mL) and washed with Et ₂ 0 (30 mL). The aqueous layer was acidified with HC1 6N until pH 5, filtered and extracted with DCM. The combined organic extracts were dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0/100 to 5/95). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 174 (2.88 g, 79%, 83% purity) as a white sticky solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 175 -175

LiAlH ₄ (338 mg, 8.45 mmol) was added portion wise to a stirred solution of intermediate 174 (2.88 g, 7.04 mmol, 83% purity) in anhydrous THF (30 mL) at -20 °C under N ₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at 65 °C for 1.5 h. NaOH (2N, aq.) and water were added. The mixture was filtered on Celite®. The organic layer was separated, dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was removed in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in heptane, gradient from 0/100 to 50/50). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 175 (1.28 g, 56%) as a colourless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 176

176

O-Phenylchlorothionoformiate (0.61 mL, 4.33 mmol) in DCM (29.1 mL) was added portionwise to a stirred solution of intermediate 175 (1.28 g, 3.93 mmol) in pyridine (0.48 mL) and DCM (29.1 mL) under N ₂ atmosphere at 0 °C. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h, quenched with the addition of MeOH (0.26 mL) and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was diluted in DCM and washed with HC1 (2M, aq.) and water. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 80:20) to afford intermediate 176 (1.5 g, 74%) as a yellow oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 177 Boc 1-177

Tributyltin hydride (CAS: 688-73-3; 6.42 mL, 23.4 mmol) and AIBN (CAS: 78-67-1; 520 mg, 3.07 mmol) were added to a stirred solution of intermediate 176 (1.35 g, 2.93 mmol) in toluene (96.3 mL) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at 100 °C for 90 min and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in heptane, gradient from 0: 100 to 15:85). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 177 (205 mg, 11%, 50% purity) as a brown oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 178

TFA (0.49 mL, 6.63 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 177 (205 mg, 0.33 mmol, 50% purity) in DCM (1 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 h. The solvent was evaporated in vacuo. Amberlyst®A26 (CAS: 39339-85-0; 2.05 gm 6.56 mmol) was added to a solution of the residue (143 mg) in MeOH (5 mL) and the mixture was stirred until the pH of the solution was basic. The mixture was filtered, washed with MeOH and concentrated in vacuo to give intermediate 178 (67.9 mg) as a yellow oil. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 179

Intermediate 179 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 174 using l-Boc-4-piperidone (CAS: 79099-07-3) and 2,6-dimethyl-4-hydroxypyridine (CAS: 13603-44-6) as starting materials.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 180

Intermediate 180 was prepare following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 175 using intermediate 179 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 181

DAST (328 pL, 2.68 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 180 (300 mg, 0.89 mmol) in anhydrous DCM (6.69 mL) at room temperature under N ₂ atmosphere.

The reaction mixture was stirred for 16 h, quenched with NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.) and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in heptane, gradient from 0/100 to 50/50) to afford intermediate 181 (167 mg 55%) as a colorless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 182

-182 Intermediate 182 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 178 using intermediate 181 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 183

Pd ₂ dba3 (73.8 mg, 80.6 pmol) was added to a mixture of CS2CO3 (1.57 g, 4.84 mmol) and DavePhos (63.5 mg, 0.16 mmol) in toluene (15 mL) while N ₂ was bubbling. The mixture was stirred for 2 min at 40 °C and 4-bromo-2,6-dimethylpyridine (CAS: 5093- 70-9; 300 mg, 1.61 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred at 40 °C for 5 min and 1- Boc-4-aminopiperidine (CAS: 87120-72-7; 323 mg, 1.61 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 24 h at 95 °C. The solvent was removed in vacuo. Water was added to the residue and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc (3 times). The combined organic layers were dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in heptane, gradient from 0/100 to 100/100). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 183 (370 mg, 75%) as a yellow solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 184 -184

Intermediate 184 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 178 using intermediate 183 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 199

-199

Pd(dppf)Cl ₂ *DCM (60 mg, 73.4 umol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 154 (400 mg, 1.22 mmol), potassium trifluoro(vinyl)borate (180 mg, 1.35 mmol) and Cs ₂ C0 ₃ (1.4 g, 2.94 mmol) in l,4-dioxane (9 mL) and water (1.12 mL). under N ₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at 90 °C in a sealed tube for 16 h. The layers were separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic fractions were washed with water and brine, dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in heptane, gradient from 0/100 to 20/80). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 199 (168 mg, 43%) as a yellow oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 200

Boc

1-200

Pd/C (10%, 56.1 mg, 52.8 umol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 199 (168 mg, 0.53 mmol) in MeOH (4 mL) at room temperature. The mixture was purge with EE and the reaction mixture was stirred for 4 h under EE atmosphere. The mixture was filtered on a pad of Celite® and the filtrate was extracted with EtOAc and MeOH. The solvent was removed in vacuo to give intermediate 200 (167 mg, 99%) as a black oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 201

TFA (0.78 mL, 10.4 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 200 (168 mg, 0.52 mmol) in DCM (2.7 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 h and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo. Amberlyst®A26 hydroxide form (CAS: 39339-85-0) was added to the residue dissolved in MeOH and the mixture was stirred at room temperature until pH was basic (2 h). The mixture was filtered and washed with MeOH. The solvent was removed to afford intermediate 201 which was used in the next step without any purification. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 202 Boc 1-202

NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 109 mg, 2.73 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 500 mg, 2.48 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) at 0 °C under N ₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. Then, 5-chloro-2-cyanopyridine (CAS: 80809-64-3; 344 mg, 2.48 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 50° C for 16 h. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in heptane, gradient from 0/100 to 20/80). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 202 (722 mg, 96%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 203

TFA (1.82 mL, 23.8 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 202 (722 mg, 2.38 mmol) in DCM (10.6 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 h. The solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0/100 to 10/90). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 203 (385 mg, 80%) as a yellow oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 204 Boc 1-204

NaOtBu (2.24 g, 23.3 mmol) was added to a solution of 1 -/e/t-butoxycarbonyl-4- hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 1.56 g, 7.78 mmol) in DMSO (3 mL), The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. Then, 3-chloro-6- methylpyridazine (CAS: 1121 79-5; 1.00 g, 7.78 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at 50 °C for 16 h. The mixture was cooled to roomtemperature and water was added. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (3 times). The combined organic layers were washed with NaHCCh and brine, dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 0/100 to 10/90). A second purification was performed by reverse phase chromatography ([25mM NH ₄ HC0 ₃ ]/[MeCN:Me0H 1 : 1], gradient from 70/30 to 27/73). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 204 (318 mg, 14%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 205 205

HC1 (4M in l,4-dioxane, 1.35 mL, 5.42 mmol) was added to intermediate 204 (318 mg, 1.08 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOEPNEb in DCM, gradient from 0/100 to 10/90). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 205 (206 mg, 98%) as a yellow oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 10

To a solution of 3-fluoro-5-hydroxypyridine (CAS: 209328-55-2, 2 g, 17.7 mmol) in Na ₂ C0 ₃ (30 mL, aq. sat. sol.) and water (10 mL), I ₂ (CAS: 7553-56-2, 9.2 g, 36.25 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at rt for 16 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with an aq. sat. sol. of Na ₂ S ₂ 0 ₃ and the solution pH was adjusted to pH=5 by addition of aqueous HC1. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 70 mL) and the combined organic layers was separated, dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo to yield intermediate 10 as a yellow solid (6.02 g, 93%). PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 11

A mixture of intermediate 10 (6.1 g, 16.7 mmol), (2-bromocthoxy)dimcthyl-/er/- butylsilane (CAS: 86864-60-0, 4.4 g, 18.4 mmol), and potassium fc/ -butoxidc (CAS: 865-47-4, 5.08 g, 36.78 mmol) in DMF (15 mL) was stirred at 90 °C for 5 h. The cooled mixture was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc (2 x 20 mL). The combined organic layers were separated, dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica; EtOAc in heptane 0/100 to 20/80). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 11 as an oil (8.1 g, 93%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 12

Tetrabutylammonium fluoride (CAS: 429-41-4, 15.3 mL, 15.3 mmol, 1M solution in THF) was added to a solution of intermediate 11 (8 g, 15.3 mmol) in THF (120 mL). The mixture was stirred at rt for 3 h. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic phase was separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 5/95). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 12 as an oil (5.8 g, 92%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 13

Potassium /erf-butoxidc (CAS: 865-47-4, 206 mg, 1.83 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 12 (5 g, 12.2 mmol) in /-BuOH (6.91 mL) at rt. The mixture was stirred at 90 °C for 3 h. After cooling, the solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 12 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (2 x 10 mL), dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 5/95). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 13 as a white solid (1.6 g, 47%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 14

Bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) dichloride (CAS: 13965-03-2, 400 mg, 0.57 mmol) and tributyl(l-ethoxyvinyl)tin (CAS: 97674-02-7; 2.5 mL, 7.4 mmol) were added to a stirred solution of intermediate 13 (1.6 g, 5.7 mmol) in toluene (15 mL). The mixture was heated at 92 °C for 16 h, then the mixture was cooled and treated with aqueous 2N HC1 (5 mL) and the mixture was stirred for 2 h. The crude was neutralised with an aq. sat. sol. of NaHC0 ₃ and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified (silica, MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 5/95). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 14 as an orange solid (0.85 g, 76%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 15

Intermediate 15 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 14 using 6-iodo-2,3-dihydro-[l,4]dioxino[2,3- b] pyridi nc (CAS: 1246088-42-5) as starting material. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 16

Intermediate 16 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 14 using 7-bromo-2,3-dihydro-[l,4]dioxino[2,3- b] pyridi nc (CAS: 95897-49-7) as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 17

Sodium borohydride (CAS: 137141-62-9, 0.73 g, 19.33 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 14 (1 g, 4.83 mmol) in MeOH (6.91 mL) at 0 °C. The mixture was stirred at rt for 10 min and then diluted with water and extracted with DCM (3 x 80 mL). The combined organic layers were dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 17 (0.86 g, 89%) as colourless oil, used in the next step without further purification.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 18

Intermediate 18 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 17 using intermediate 15 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 19

Intermediate 19 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 17 using intermediate 16 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 20

Thionyl chloride (CAS: 7719-09-7, 1.26 mL, 17.27 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 17 (0.86 g, 4.32 mmol) in DCM (29 mL) at 0 °C. The mixture was stirred at rt for 12 h and then diluted with water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 20 (0.89 g, 95%) as cream solid, used in the next step without further purification.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 21

Intermediate 21 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 20 using intermediate 18 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 22

Intermediate 22 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 20 using intermediate 19 as starting material. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 23

m-Chloroperbenzoic acid (CAS: 937-14-4; 806 mg, 4.7 mmol) was added to a mixture of 5-fluoro-2,3-dihydrofuro[2,3-b]pyridine (CAS: 1356542-41-0; 500 mg, 3.6 mmol) in DCM (15 mL) at rt. The mixture was stirred at 25°C for 36 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo, and the crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in heptane 0/100 to 30/70 then DCM in MeOH 0/100 to 6/94). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents evaporated in vacuo to yield intermediate 23 as a white solid (400 mg, 72%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 24

Trimethylsilyl cyanide (CAS: 7677-24-9; 1.29 mL, 10.3 mmol) and triethylamine (0.9 mL, 6.47 mmol) were added to a mixture of intermediate 23 (400 mg, 2.57 mmol) in acetonitrile (7 mL). The mixture was stirred at 90 °C for 24 h. The mixture was cooled, diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc (2 x 10 mL). The combined organic extracts were dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in heptane 0/100 to 40/60). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 24 as an oil (320 mg, 76%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 25

Methyl magnesium bromide (CAS: 75-16-1, 2.071 mL, 2.9 mmol, 1.4 M in

THF/toluene) was added dropwise to a solution of intermediate 24 (340 mg, 2.071 mmol) in dry THF (20 mL) at 0°C. After completion of the addition, the reaction was stirred at rt for 16 h. The mixture was quenched with 1M aq HC1 and stirred for 30 min, then the crude was basified with NH ₄ OH until pH 8. The solution was extracted with EtOAc (2x5 mL) The combined organic extracts were dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in heptane 0/100 to 20/80). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 25 as colourless oil (150 mg, 40%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 26

Acetic anhydride (CAS: 108-24-7; 13.2 g, 129.8 mmol) was added to a stirred mixture of methyl 6-amino-5-bromopyridine-2-carboxylate (CAS: 178876-82-9; 30 g, 129.8 mmol) in toluene (600 mL) under N ₂ . The mixture was stirred at 100 °C for 36 h and then the solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica; EtOAc in petroleum ether 0/100 to 50/50). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 26 as a white solid (14.0 g, 40%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 27

Intermediate 27 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 26 using 2,5-dibromo-4-fluoroaniline (CAS: 172377- 05-8) as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 28

Phosphorus pentasulfide (CAS: 1314-80-3; 13.7 g, 61.5 mmol) was added to a suspension of intermediate 26 (14.0 g, 51.3 mmol) in THF (200 mL) under N ₂ . The mixture was stirred at rt for 16 h and then at 70 °C for 48 h. The solvent was evaporated in vacuo and the residue purified by flash column chromatography (silica; EtOAc in petroleum ether 0/100 to 50/50). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 28 as a yellow solid (7.5 g, 69%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 29

Sodium borohydride (CAS: 16940-66-2; 6.81 g, 180.0 mmol) was added to a stirred suspension of intermediate 28 (7.55 g, 36.0 mmol) in THF (60 mL). The mixture was stirred at 25 °C for 5 h and then a aq. sat. sol. NH ₄ Cl (100 mL) was added. The mixture was extracted with DCM and the organic layer was separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo to yield intermediate 29 as a yellow solid (3.1 g, 51%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 30

Mn0 ₂ (CAS: 1313-13-9; 7.48 g, 86.0 mmol) was added to a stirred suspension of intermediate 29 (3.1 g, 17.2 mmol) in l,4-dioxane (50 mL). The mixture was stirred at 80 °C for 16 h and then filtered through a Celite® pad. The filtrate was evaporated in vacuo and the residue purified by flash column chromatography (silica; EtOAc in petroleum ether 0/100 to 50/50). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 30 as a yellow solid (2.0 g, 65%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 31

Phosphorus pentasulfide (CAS: 1314-80-3; 0.9 g, 4.06 mmol) was added to a suspension of intermediate 27 (0.97 g, 3.12 mmol) in THF (17 mL) under N ₂ . The mixture was stirred at rt for 16 h. Then CS ₂ CO ₃ (1.63 g, 4.99 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at 70 °C for 16 h. Then, the mixture was diluted with water and 2N aq. NaOH were added and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was separated, dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica; EtOAc in heptane 0/100 to 80/20). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 31 as a yellow solid (0.62 g, 61%).

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 32

Intermediate 31 (620 mg, 1.9 mmol) was added to a stirred suspension of sodium hydride (CAS: 7646-69-7; 60% dispersion in mineral oil, 91 mg, 2.28 mmol) in toluene (8.51 mL). The mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h and then, DMF (1.7 mL) was added and the resulting reaction mixture was stirred at 110 °C for 16 h. The mixture was diluted with aq. sat. sol. NaCl and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was separated, dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo to yield intermediate 32 (0.43 g, 92%) as a white solid, used in the next step without further purification.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 33

Intermediate 33 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 14 using intermediate 32 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 34

Intermediate 34 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 17 using intermediate 25 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 35

Intermediate 35 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 17 using intermediate 33 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 36

Intermediate 36 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 20 using intermediate 34 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 37

Intermediate 37 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 20 using intermediate 35 as starting material.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 122 -122

To a mixture of 6-bromo-2-methyl-[l,3]thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridine (CAS: 886372-92-5; 1.26 g, 5.50 mmol) in toluene (19.3 mL) were added PdCl ₂ (PPh3)2 (425 mg, 061 mmol) and tributyl(l-ethoxyvinyl)tin (CAS: 97674-02-7; 2.60 mL, 7.70 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 92 °C for 16 h. HC1 (2N, 1 mL) was added the mixture was stirred for 3 h at room temperature. The crude mixture was neutralized with NaHCCh (sat., aq.) and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic extracts were dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 0:100). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 122 (872 mg, 82%) as a yellow solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 123

NaBEE (644 mg, 17.0 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 122 (818 mg, 4.26 mmol) in EtOH (20 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 10 min and water was added the aqueous phase was extracted with DCM (3 x 20 mL). The combined organic layers were dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The aqueous phase was further extracted with EtOAc and THF (8:2). The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 123 (838 mg, 99%) as a light yellow oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 124

-124

Methanesulfonyl chloride (27.1 pL, 0.35mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 123 (40.8 mg, 0.21 mmol) and Et ₃ N (58.5 pL, 0.42 mmol) in anhydrous DCM (2 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with DCM. The combined organic layers were dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to afford intermediate 124 which was used in the next step without further purification. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 125

Phosphorus pentasulfide (8.74 g, 39.3 mmol) was added to a suspension of 2-acetamido- 3-bromo-5-fluoropyridine (CAS: 1065074-95-4; 7.05 g, 30.3 mmol) in THF (165 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for l6h. Additional quantity of phosphorus pentasulfide (2.02 g, 9.1 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at for another 16 h. CS2CO3 (15.8 g, 48.4 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at 70 °C for 16 h. Additional quantity of CS2CO3 (15.8 g, 48.4 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at 70 °C for 3 days. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 40:60). The desired fractions were concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 125 (3.82 g, 75%) as a yellow solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 126

-126

Methy ltrio xorhenium( VII) (CAS: 70197-13-6; 311 mg, 1.25 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 125 (1.40 g, 8.32 mmol) in anhydrous DCM (22.3 mL) and H2O2 (30% purity, 3.4 mL, 33.3 mmol) at room temperature under N2 atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at for 40 h, and manganese(IV) oxide (activated, 134 mg, 1.54 mmol) was added. After gas evolution stopped, magnesium sulfate was added. The mixture was filtered and washed with DCM, a mixture of DCM and EtOH (9:1) and MeOH. The filtrate was evaporated in vacuo. The crude mixture was combined with another fraction (5.95 mmol) and purified by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM/MeOH, gradient from 100:0 to 90: 10) to afford intermediate 126 (850 mg, 34%) as a cream solid PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 127 -127

DCM (60.4 mL) was added to a mixture of tetrabutylammonium bromide (3.15 g, 9.77 mmol), molecular sieves and intermediate 126 (1.20 g, 6.52 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 10 min, and / -tolucncsulfonic anhydride (3.19 g, 9.77 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 16 h. The mixture was filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM) to afford intermediate 127 (1.03 g, 64%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 128

Tributyl(l-ethoxyvinyl)tin (CAS: 97674-02-7; 1.64 mL, 4.86 mmol) followed by PdCl ₂ (PPh3)2 (284 mg, 0.41 mmol) were added to a stirred solution of intermediate 127 (1.00 g, 4.05 mmol) in toluene (19.9 mL) in a sealed tube and under N ₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at 80 °C for 48 h. Then HC1 (1N, 2 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred at 70 °C for 7 h. NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.) was added and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 80:20). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 128 (620 mg, 73%) as a light orange solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 129 129

NaBEE (241 mg, 6.38 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 128 (670 mg, 3.19 mmol) in EtOH (16.4 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0 °C for 90 min. Water was added and the mixture was extracted with DCM. The combined organic layers were dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give intermediate 129 (663 mg) which was used in the next reaction step without further purification.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 130 130

Carbon tetrachloride (3.02, mL, 31.3 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 129 (663 mg, 3.13 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (1.64 g, 6.2 mmol) in CHCb (2.65 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 days. Additional amounts of triphenylphosphine (0.41 g, 1.61 mmol) and carbon tetrachloride (0.60 mL, 6.2 mmol) were added and the mixture was stirred for another 5 h. The solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 80:20) to afford intermediate 130 (488 mg, 68%) as a white solid. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 131 131

Methylmagnesium bromide (1.4M solution, 0.36 mL, 0.5 mmol) was added to a mixture of2H, 3H, 4H-pyrano[2,3-b]pyridine-7-carbonitrile (CAS: 1824095-79-5; 80.0 mg, 0.5 mmol) in anhydrous THF (1.45 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 16 h at room temperature. Additional quantity of methylmagnesium bromide (1.4M solution, 0.36 mL, 0.5 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred for another 16 h. The reaction was quenched with NH ₄ Cl (sat., aq.) and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated to dryness. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 70:30) to afford intermediate 131 (46 mg, 52%) as a white solid. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 132 132

Sodium methoxide (25% purity, 1.44 pL, 6.3 pmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 131 (46.0 mg, 0.26 mmol) in MeOH (0.70 mL) at 0 °C under N ₂ atmosphere. NaBH ₄ (9.82 mg, 0.26 mmol) was added portionwise and the reaction mixture was stirred at 0 °C for 10 min. Water was added and the mixture was extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 132 (26 mg, 56%) as a colorless oil PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 133 133

Thionyl chloride (42.5 pL, 0.58 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 132 (26 mg, 0.15 mmol) in DCM (067 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h. NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.) was added and the mixture was extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to afford intermediate 133 (26 mg, 90%) as an oil which was used in the next reaction step without further purification.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 134 -134

Sodium methoxide (25% purity, 13.4 pL, 58.7 pmol) was added to a stirred solution of 1 {furo[3,2-b]pyridine-6-yl}ehtan-l-one (CAS: 1203499-00-6; 390 mg, 2.42 mmol) in MeOH (6.5 mL) at 0 °C under N ₂ atmosphere. NaBH ₄ (91.5 mg, 2.42 mmol) was added portionwise and the reaction mixture was stirred for 10 min. Water was added and the mixture was extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 0: 100) to afford intermediate 134 (350 mg, 89%) as a brown oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 135 -135

A solution of intermediate 134 (310 mg, 1.90 mmol) in EtOH (41.5 mL) was hydrogenated in a H-cube reactor (1 mL/min, 35 mm Pd/C 10% cartridge, full H ₂ mode, 70 °C, 3 cycles). The solvent was evaporated in vacuo to afford intermediate 135 (290 mg, 92%) as a colorless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 136 -136

Thionyl chloride (177 pL, 2.43 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 135 (100 mg, 0.61 mmol) in DCM (2.78 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 h and NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.) was added. The mixture was extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to afford intermediate 136 (88 mg, 79%) as an oil which was used in the next reaction step without further purification.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 137 -137

A solution 4-pentyn-l-ol (0.53 mL, 5.66 mmol) in THF (2.5 ml) was added dropwise to a suspension of NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 235 mg, 5.89 mmol) in THF (15 mL) under N ₂ atmosphere at 0 °C. The mixture was stirred at 10 °C for 1 h. The temperature was cooled at 0 °C and a solution of 2-chloro-5-fluoropyrimidine (CAS: 62802-42-3; 500 mg, 3.77 mmol) in THF (2.5 mL) was added dropwise at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. The reaction was quenched with water and the crude was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phases were dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM) to afford intermediate 137 (460 mg, 68%) as a colorless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 138

A mixture of intermediate 137 (3.23 g, 17.9 mmol) in nitrobenzene (24 mL) was heated at 225 °C for 6 days. The mixture was treated with a solution of HC1 (2N). The mixture was stirred for 1 h and the aqueous layer was separated and treated with Na ₂ C0 ₃ to pH basic. The crude was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 70:30) to afford intermediate 138 (470 mg, 17%) as a yellow oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 139

139

m-CPBA (847 mg, 4.91 mmol) was added portionwise to a solution of intermediate 138 (470 mg, 3.07 mmol) in DCM (6.2 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 h. The mixture was loaded to a column chromatography and purified via flash column chromatography (silica, NFT (7M in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0 : 100 to 4:96). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo to afford intermediate 139 (440 mg, 85%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 140 -140 Trimethylsilyl cyanide (1.24 mL, 9.91 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 139 (406 mg, 2.40 mmol) and Et ₃ N (0.86 mL, 6.19 mmol) in CH ₃ CN (6.21 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 85 °C for 16 h, cooled down and treated with water. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAC, gradient from 100:0 to 40:60) to afford intermediate 140 (390 mg, 91%) as an off- white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 141

Methylmagnesium bromide (3.2M in Me-THF, 065 mL, 2.07 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 140 (335 mg, 1.88 mmol) in anhydrous THF (5.46 mL) at 0 °C. After completion of the addition, the reaction mixture was stirred for 16 h at room temperature. Additional quantity of methylmagnesium bromide (0.3 mL, 1.00 mmol) was added at 0 °C and the reaction mixture was stirred for 16 h. NEECl (sat., aq.) was added and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated to dryness. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 70:30). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH ₄ HC0 ₃ (0.25% solution in water)/CEl ₃ CN, gradient from 85:15 to 55:45) to afford intermediate 141 (46 mg, 13%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 142 142

Sodium methoxide (25% purity, 1.65 pL, 7.21 pmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 141 (58.0 mg, 0.30 mmol) in MeOH (0.80 mL) at 0 °C under N ₂ atmosphere. NaBEE (11.2 mg, 0.30 mmol) was added portionwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0 °C for 10 min and at room temperature for 1 h. Water was added and the mixture was extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 142 (54 mg, 92%) as a colorless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 143

Thionyl chloride (80.3 mE, 1.10 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 142 (54.0 mg, 0.27 mmol) in DCM (1.26 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 h. NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.) was added and the mixture was extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to afford intermediate 143 (46 mg, 78%) as an oil which was used in the next reaction step without further purification.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 144

Boc -144

Tributyl(l-ethoxyvinyl)tin (CAS: 97674-02-7; 9.79 mL, 28.9 mmol) followed by PdCl ₂ (PPh ₃ ) ₂ (1.85 g, 2.63 mmol) were added to a stirred solution of fc/ -butyl-7-bromo- 2,3-dihydro-4H-pyrido[3,2-b][l,4]oxazine-4-carboxylate (CAS: 335030-30-3; 8.30 g, 26.3 mmol) in l,4-dioxane (166 mL) in a sealed tube and under N ₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at 80 °C overnight. Then HC1 (1M in H ₂ 0, 13.2 mL, 13.2 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min. The mixture was treated with NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.) and ice water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 20:80, then EtOAc in heptane, gradient from 0:100 to 50:50). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 144 (5.6 g, 76%) as a white solid. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 145

145

A mixture of 4-hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 5382-16-1; 4.65 g, 45.9 mmol) and K ₂ CO ₃ (9.53 g, 68.9 mmol) in CH ₃ CN (100 mL) was stirred at room temperature under N ₂ atmosphere for 10 min. Intermediate 20 (5.00 g, 23.0 mmol) was added dropwise and the reaction mixture was stirred at 80 °C overnight. The mixture was evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was combined with another fraction (11.7 mmol) and purified by flash column chromatography (silica, petroleum ether/EtO Ac, gradient from 100:0 to 3:1). The pure fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to give intermediate 145 (8.04 g, 48%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 146 146

NaBH ₄ (185 mg, 4.90 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of 6-acetyl-2,3- dihydro furo[2,3-b]pyridine (200 mg, 1.23 mmol) in EtOH (7 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0 °C for 15 min and then at room temperature for 30 min. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with DCM (3x 5 mL). The organic layer was separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo to afford intermediate 146 (160 mg, 79%) as yellow oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 147 147

Thionyl chloride (0.28 mL, 3.89 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 146 (160 mg, 0.97 mmol) in DCM (5 mL) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h. Water was added and the mixture was extracted with DCM. The combined organic layers were dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo to yield intermediate 147 (170 mg, 96%) as yellow oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATES 185 AND 186

To a solution of 6-bromo-3-fluoro-2-methylpyridine (CAS: 374633-38-2; 500 mg, 2.63 mmol) in anhydrous THF (10 mL) was added was added n-BuLi (2.5M in hexane, 1.05 mL, 2.6 mmol) dropwise at -78 °C and under N2 atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at -78 °C for 1 h and a solution of triisopropyl borate (CAS: 5419-55-6; 1.34 mL, 5.79 mmol) in anhydrous THF (5 mL) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at - 78 °C for 1 h, quenched with water and concentrated in vacuo to afford a mixture of intermediates 185 and 186 (615 mg, quant.) which was used in the next step without any purification.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 187 187

To a suspension of intermediates 185 and 186 in a mixture of THF (15 mL) and water (5 mL) was added H2O2 (30% purity, 1.61 mL, 15.8 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 h and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was partitioned between EtOAc and water. The organic layer was separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 20:80). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 187 (132 mg, 24%) as a white solid. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 188 AND FINAL COMPOUND 167

DBAD (CAS: 870-50-8; 218 mg, 0.95 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate

187 (150 mg, 0.73 mmol), intermediate 116 (202 mg, 0.77 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (248 mg, 0.95 mmol) in toluene (3.92 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 80 °C for 24 h and the solvent was removed in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 5:95). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate

188 (105 mg, 32%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 189

Triphenylphosphine (1.17 g, 4.45 mmol) was added to a stirred mixture of methyl 5- hydroxypyridine-2-carboxylate (CAS: 30766-12-2; 500 mg, 3.27 mmol) and l-Boc-4- hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 597 mg, 2.97 mmol) in anhydrous THF (30 mL) under N ₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 min, and DIAD (CAS: 2446-83-5; 0.88 mL, 4.45 mmol) was added dropwise at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 30:70). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 189 (750 mg, 74%) as a colorless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 190 190 TFA (5.68 mL, 73.6 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 189 (0.75 g, 2.23 mmol) in DCM (18.6 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 20 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOfLNLb in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 10:90). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give intermediate 190 (536 mg, 99%) as a colorless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 191

Intermediate 21 (118 mg, 0.59 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 191 (116 mg, 0.49 mmol) and K2CO3 (136 mg, 0.98 mmol) in CH3CN (5 mL) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at 79 °C for 24 h. The mixture was diluted with NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.) and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 4:96). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 191 (70 mg, 35%) as a white sticky solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 192 -192

Intermediate 192 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 191 using intermediate 20 and intermediate 190 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 4:96) to afford intermediate 192 (102 mg, 50%) as a colorless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 193

LiOH*H ₂ 0 (8.83 mg, 0.21 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 191 (70.0 mg, 0.18 mmol) in THF (1.43 mL) and H ₂ 0 (0.36 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred for 16 h at room temperature. The mixture was acidified with HC1 (2M) to pH 2-3 and concentrated in vacuo to give intermediate 193 which was used as such in the next step.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 194 194

Intermediate 194 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 193 using intermediate 192 as starting material. The crude product was used in the next step without any purification.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 195

NaH (60% in mineral oil, 194 mg, 4.85 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of isopropyl alcohol (4 mL, 52.3 mmol) in THF (24 mL) at 0 °C under N ₂ atmosphere. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. 4-Bromo-2,6-dichloropyridine (CAS: 98027-80- 6; 1.00 g, 4.41 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 95:5). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 195 (902 mg, 82%) as a colorless oil. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 196

196

NaO/Bu (369 mg, 3.84 mmol) was added to a solution of l-tert-butoxycarbonyl-4- hydroxypiperidine (CAS: 109384-19-2; 644 mg, 3.20 mmol) in DMSO (20 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 h at 0 °C. Intermediate 195 (802 mg, 3.20 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at 50 °C for 16 h. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and water was added. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were washed with NaHC0 ₃ and brine, dried, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 90:10). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 196 (876 mg, 74%) as a colorless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 197

-197

Intermediate 196 (776 mg, 2.09 mmol) and methylboronic acid (320 mg, 5.23 mmol) were added to a stirred mixture of Na ₂ C0 ₃ (665 mg, 6.28 mmol) l,4-dioxane (5.23 mL) and water (1.31 mL) under N ₂ atmosphere. Pd(dppf)Cl ₂ *DCM (85.4 mg, 0.11 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 105 °C for 72 h. The mixture was diluted with NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.) and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 95:5 to 80:20). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 197 (599 mg, 81%) as a colorless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 198 -198

HC1 (4M in l,4-dioxane, 2.14 mL, 8.56 mmol) was added dropwise to intermediate 197 (599 mg, 1.71 mmol) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOfENTb in DCM, gradient from 0/100 to 10/90). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give intermediate 198 (395 mg, 92%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 199

Intermediate 199 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate XX using l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine and 2-chloro-4,5- dimethylpyridine (CAS: 343268-69-9) as starting materials. The crude was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in heptane 0/100 to 70/30). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 199 (106.8 mg, 35%) as a colourless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 200

. HC1

Intermediate 200 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 59. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 201

Intermediate 201 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 72 using 4-hydroxy- l-piperidinecarboxylic acid 1,1- dimethylethyl ester (CAS: 109384-19-2) and 6-bromopyridin-3-ol (CAS: 55717-40-3) as starting materials. The crude was purified by flash column chromatography (silica: EtOAc acetate in heptane, 0/100 to 30/70). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 201 (130 mg, 63%) as a colourless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 202

HC1 (4M in dioxane, 2.361 mL, 9.445 mmol) was added to intermediate 201 (125 mg, 0.35mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. The reaction was concentrated to dryness. Then the residue was purified by ion exchange chromatography using an ISOLUTE SCX2 cartridge eluting first with methanol and then with 7M solution of ammonia in methanol. The desired fraction were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 202 (86 mg, 96%) as a colourless oil, which was used in the following step without further purification. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 203

Phosphorous tribromide (365.20 pL 3.85 mmol) was added to a solution of 2-methyl-6- (trifluoromethyl)-4-pyridinemethanol (CAS: 1936597-62-4, 490 mg, 2.563 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) dropwise at 0 °C and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours atr.t. The mixture was diluted with DCM washed with NaHC0 ₃ . The organic layer was dried over MgS0 ₄ , filtered and the solvent removed. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica; EtOAc in heptane 0/100 to 30/70). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 203 (477 mg, 73%) as a colourless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 204

Intermediate 204 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 170 using l-Boc-4-hydroxypiperidine and intermediate 203 as starting material. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography

(silica; EtOAc in heptane from 0/100 to 100/0). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated to yield intermediate 204 (478 mg, 68%) as a colourless oil.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 205

Intermediate 205 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 150 using intermediate 204 as starting material. Intermediate 205 (106.4 mg, 61%) was isolated as a red foamy solid, which was used without further purification.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 206

Intermediate 206 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 72 using 2-(trifluoromethyl)-5-pyrimidinol and l-Boc- 4-hydroxypiperidine as starting materials. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica: ethyl acetate in heptane, 0/100 to 30/70). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield intermediate 206 (980 mg, 65%) as a light yellow solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 207

. HC1

Intermediate 207 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of intermediate 41 using intermediate 206 as starting material. The crude product (540 mg, 96%) was isolated as a white solid and used without further purification.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 208

2,4-Dibromo-thiazole (CAS: 4175-77-3, 50 g, 205.83 mmol), N-[(2,4- dimethoxyphenyl)methyl]-2,4-dimethoxy-benzenemethanamine (CAS : 20781 -23-1 , 65.33 g, 205, 83 mmol) and Na ₂ C0 ₃ (65.51 g, 618 mmol) in CH3CN (500 mL) was heated for 36 hours. The mixture was concentrated and dissolved in EtOAc (lOOOmL). The mixture was washed with water (50 mL) and brine, dried over MgS0 ₄ , and concentrated to give crude product, which was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (petroleum ether/EtOAc, from 100/0 to 70/30) to give intermediate 208 (70 g, 70%) as a yellow solid. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 209

To a solution of intermediate 208 (15 g, 31.29 mmol) in anhydrous THF (20 mL) was added dropwise LDA (34.42 mL, 34.42 mmol) at a rate so the temperature did not exceed -70 °C. The resulting solution was stirred at -78 °C for 30 min. Then DMF (2.52 g, 34.42 mmol) was added dropwise as a solution in THF (20 mL) and the mixture was allowed to warm up to room temperature. The reaction was quenched with saturated NH ₄ Cl (30 mL). The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (2 x 50 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over MgS0 ₄ , and concentrated. The crude was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel (petroleum ether/EtOAc, from 100/0 to 80/20) to yield intermediate 209 (8 g, 45%) as a light yellow solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 210

Intermediate 209 (2006.23 mg, 3.95 mmol) was added to intermediate (37?)-34 from W02018/109202 (729 mg, 3.57 mmol) at RT. After 30 min, sodium

triacetoxyborohydride (1512.43 mg, 7.14 mmol) was added to the mixture at RT and the RM was stirred for 48 h at RT. The crude was quenched with NH3/H2O and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by automated flash chromatography (silica, 10% MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 5/95). Desired fractions were collected, concentrated under vacuo to yield intermediate 210 (1.1 g, 44%) as a sticky solid. PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 211

A mixture of intermediate 210 (1050 mg, 1.51 mmol) in TFA (26.25 mL) was stirred at RT under a nitrogen atmosphere for 1.5 h. The solvent was evaporated and the mixture was taken in water, basified with K2CO3 and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried over MgS0 ₄ and concentrated. The residue was purified on a column with silica gel, eluent DCM/MeOH (100/0 to 90/10). The pure fractions were evaporated, yielding intermediate 211 (521 mg, 87%) as a white solid.

PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATE 212

Acetic anhydride (7.75 mg, 0.076 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of intermediate 211 (20 mg, 0.051 mmol) in l,4-dioxane (15 mL) while stirring. After the addition was complete, the reaction was heated at 60°C for 2 h, then at 1 l0°C for 4 h. The RM was evaporated, taken up in water/0.5 g NaHCOEDCM. The organic layer was separated, dried over MgS0 ₄ and concentrated. The residue was purified on a column with silica gel, eluent: DCM/MeOH (100/0 to 95/5). The pure fractions were concentrated, yielding intermediate 212 (135 mg, 41%) as a pale yellow foam. PREPARATION OF [ ³ H] -LIGAND FOR OCCUPANCY STUDY

Compound 28 from W02018/109202 was labelled with [ ³ H] as follows:

Intermediate 212 (4.10 mg, 9.38 pmol) and Palladium supported on Carbon (10%, 14.4 mg) were suspended in DMF (0.2 mL) and DIPEA (12 pL, 70.6 pmol) was added. The suspension was degassed three times and stirred under an atmosphere of Tritium gas (4.2 Ci, 525 mbar initial pressure) for 2 h 47 min at RT (end pressure was 311 mbar, no more consumption of gas was observed). The solvent was removed in vacuo, and labile tritium was exchanged by adding MeOH (0.3 mL), stirring the solution, and removing the solvent again under vacuo. This process was repeated twice. Finally, the well dried solid was extracted with EtOH (5 mL) and the suspension was filtered through a 0.2 pm nylon membrane (Macherey-Nagel Polyamide syringe filter

CHROMAFIL®Xtra PA-20/25), obtaining a clear solution.

The radiochemical purity (RCP) of the crude material was determined to be 56% using the following HPLC system: Waters Atlantis T3, 5 pm, 4.6 x 250 mm; solvents A: water + 0.05% TFA, B: acetonitrile + 0.05% TFA; 0 min 0% B; 10 min 30% B; 10.2- 14.5 min 95% B; 15 min 0% B; 254 nm; 1.0 mL/min; 30 °C.

The crude was purified by HPLC: Waters Atlantis T3, 5 pm, 10 x 250 mm; solvents A: water + 0.1% TFA; B: acetonitrile + 0.1% TFA; 0 min 0% B, 15 min 45% B; 4.7 mL/min; 25 °C. The target compound eluted at 9.5 min, and isolated from the HPLC solvent mixture by solid phase extraction. Therefore, the HPLC solution was neutralized with an aqueous solution of NaHC0 ₃ and the volume of the fractions were partially reduced at the rotary evaporator. Then the product was extracted with a Phenomenex StrataX cartridge (33 pm Polymeric Reversed Phase, 100 mg, 3 mL; 8B- S100-EB) which was eluted with EtOH (5 mL). The extracted product showed an RCP of >99% and the specific activity (SA) was determined to be 10.7 Ci/mmol (396 GBq/mmol, determined by MS). Two batches 250 pCi (9.25 MBq) in 0.25 mL EtOH (lmCi/mL) and 38.8 mCi in 5 mL EtOH of [ ³ H] -ligand were isolated. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUNDS

El. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUNDS 1 , 2 AND 3

Method 1 : 2,3-dihydro-[l,4]dioxino[2,3-b]pyridine-6-carboxaldehyde (CAS: 615568- 24-6, 184 mg, 1.11 mmol) and titanium (IV) isopropoxide (CAS: 546-68-9, 0.44 mL, 1.52 mmol) were added to a stirred solution of intermediate 6 (209 mg, 1.01 mmol) in

DCM (3.4 mL) at rt and under N ₂ . The mixture was stirred at rt for 3 h. Then it was cooled at 0 °C and methyl magnesium bromide (CAS: 75-16-1, 3.62 mL, 5.07 mmol,

1.4 M in THF/toluene) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred at this temperature for 5 min and at rt for 16 h. The mixture was treated with aq. sat. sol. NH ₄ Cl, diluted with DCM. The organic layer was separated, washed with aq. sat. sol. NaCl, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: XBridge C18 50 x 100 mm, 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 80% NH ₄ HC0 ₃ 0.25% solution in water, 20% CH3CN to 63% NH ₄ HC0 ₃ 0.25% solution in water, 37% CH ₃ CN). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo to yield compound 1 as a brown syrup (78 mg, 21%).

Compound 1 (78 mg) was purified via chiral SFC (stationary phase: CHIRACEL OJ-H 5pm 250*20mm, mobile phase: 84% CO2, 16% MeOH (0.3% iPrNH ₂ )) yielding compound 2 (30 mg, 8%) and compound 3 (31 mg, 8%) both as oils. Compounds 2 and 3 were dissolved in Et ₂ 0 and then HC1 (2N in Et ₂ 0) was added. The resulting solids were filtered and dried to give compounds 2 (27.3 mg, 7%, HC1 salt) and 3 (30 mg, 7%, HC1 salt) both as white solids.

Method 2: Potassium carbonate (CAS: 584-08-7, 2.63 g, 19.05 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 6 (1.31 g, 6.35 mmol) and intermediate 21 (1.27 g, 6.35 mmol) in acetonitrile (50 mL) at rt. The mixture was stirred at 70 °C for 36 h. The reaction was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc (3x). The organic layer was separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica; 7M solution of ammonia in MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 3/97). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents evaporated in vacuo to yield compound 1 as a pale-yellow oil (1.77 g, 75%).

E2. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUNDS 4, 148 AND 149

Compound 4 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 2 for the synthesis of compound 1 using intermediate 6 (159 mg, 0.77 mmol) and intermediate 20 (120 mg, 0.55 mmol) as starting materials. Compound 4 was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 80% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 20% CH3CN to 60% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 40% CH3CN). The desired fractions were collected and partially concentrated in vacuo. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3x), separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo to yield compound 4 (34 mg, 16%) as a colorless oil.

Compound 4 (1.20 g) was purified via chiral SFC (stationary phase: CHIRACEL OJ-H 5pm 250*30mm, mobile phase: 80% CO2, 20% EtOH (0.3% z-PrNEE)) to afford 2 fractions: fraction A (461 mg) and fraction B (468 mg).

Fraction A (460 mg, 1.19 mmol) was dissolved in tert- butyl methyl ether (3 mL) and HC1 (2M in Et ₂ 0, 1.79 mL, 3.56 mmol) was added under stirring. The resulting precipitate was filtered off and dried at 50 °C under vacuum to give compound 148 (525 mg, 96%).

Compound 149 (545 mg, 98%) was obtained following an analogous procedure to the one reported for the synthesis of compound 148 (468 mg), using fraction B as starting material. E3. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 5

Compound 5 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 2 for the synthesis of compound 1 using intermediate 6 (150 mg, 0.73 mmol) and intermediate 22 (140 mg, 0.71 mmol) as starting materials. Compound 5 was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 80% NH ₄ HCO ₃ 0.25% solution in water, 20% CH ₃ CN to 60% NH ₄ HCO ₃ 0.25% solution in water, 40% CH ₃ CN). The desired fractions were collected and partially concentrated in vacuo. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3x), separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo to yield compound 5 (150 mg, 56%) as a colorless oil.

E4. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 6

Compound 6 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 2 for the synthesis of compound 1 using intermediate 6 (70 mg, 0.34 mmol) and intermediate 36 (68 mg, 0.34 mmol) as starting materials. Compound 6 was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 75% NH ₄ HCO ₃ 0.25% solution in water, 25% CH ₃ CN to 57% NH ₄ HCO ₃ 0.25% solution in water, 43% CH ₃ CN). The desired fractions were collected and partially concentrated in vacuo. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3x), separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo to yield compound 6 (71 mg, 57%) as a pale-orange oil. E130. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUNDS 143, 144 AND 145

A purification of compound 6 (230 mg) was performed via chiral SFC (stationary phase: CHIRACEL OJ-H 5pm 250*20mm, mobile phase: 85% C0 ₂ , 15% MeOH (0.3% i- PrNFF)) to afford compound 143 (91 mg) and fraction B (92 mg) as yellow oils.

HC1 (2M in Et ₂ 0, 49.2 uL, 98.5 umol) was added to a stirred solution of compound 143 (18.3 mg, 49.3 umol) in Et ₂ 0 (0.3 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5 min. The suspension was filtered and the solid was dried under vacuum at 50 °C for 3 days to give compound 144 (14 mg, 64%) as a white solid.

Compound 145 (102 mg, 93%) was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one reported for the synthesis of compound 144 using fraction B (92 mg) as starting material.

E5. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 7

Compound 7 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 1 for the synthesis of compound 1 using intermediate 6 (100 mg, 0.48 mmol) and intermediate 30 (104 mg, 0.58 mmol) as starting materials yielding compound 7 (63 mg, 34%) as a yellow sticky solid. E6. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 8

Compound 8 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 2 for the synthesis of compound 1 using intermediate 6 (50 mg, 0.22 mmol) and intermediate 37 (49 mg, 0.24 mmol) as starting materials. Compound 8 was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 80% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 20% CH3CN to 0% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 100% CH3CN). The desired fractions were collected and partially concentrated in vacuo. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3x), separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo to yield yielding compound 8 (55 mg, 64%) as a colorless oil.

E7. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUNDS 9, 10 AND 11

Compound 9 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 1 for the synthesis of compound 1 using intermediate 7 (186 mg, 0.9 mmol) and 2,3-dihydro-[l,4]dioxino[2,3-b]pyridine-6-carboxaldehyde (CAS: 615568-24-6, 163 mg, 0.99 mmol) as starting materials yielding compound 9 (163 mg, 49%) as brown syrup.

Compound 9 (160 mg) was purified via chiral SFC (stationary phase: CHIRALPAK AD-H 5pm 250*30mm, mobile phase: 92% CO2, 8% iPrOH (0.3% iPrNFF)) yielding compound 10 (65 mg, 20%) and compound 11 (56 mg, 17%) both as oils. Compounds 10 and 11 were dissolved in Et ₂ 0 and then HC1 (2N in Et ₂ 0) was added. The resulting solids were filtered and dried to give compounds 10 (64 mg, 18%, HC1 salt) and 11 (54 mg, 15%, HC1 salt) both as white solids. E8. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 12

Compound 12 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 2 for the synthesis of compound 1 using intermediate 7 (211 mg, 0.77 mmol) and intermediate 20 (120 mg, 0.55 mmol) as starting materials. Compound 12 was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 75% NH ₄ HCO ₃ 0.25% solution in water, 25% CH ₃ CN to 57% NH ₄ HCO ₃ 0.25% solution in water, 43% CH ₃ CN). The desired fractions were collected and partially concentrated in vacuo. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3x), separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo to yield compound 12 (102 mg, 48%) as a colorless oil.

E9. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 13

Compound 13 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 2 for the synthesis of compound 1 using intermediate 7 (192 mg, 0.93 mmol) and intermediate 22 (167 mg, 0.83 mmol) as starting materials. Compound 13 was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 80% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 20% CH3CN to 60% NH ₄ HCO ₃ 0.25% solution in water, 40% CH ₃ CN). The desired fractions were collected and partially concentrated in vacuo. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3x), separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo to yield compound 13 (92 mg, 27%) as a yellow sticky solid. E10. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 14

Compound 14 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 2 for the synthesis of compound 1 using intermediate 8 (162 mg, 0.73 mmol) and intermediate 21 (135 mg, 0.68 mmol) as starting materials yielding compound 14 (160 mg, 57%) as a colorless oil.

El l. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 15

Compound 15 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 2 for the synthesis of compound 1 using intermediate 8 (51 mg, 0.23 mmol) and intermediate 20 (50 mg, 0.23 mmol) as starting materials. Compound 15 was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 60% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 40% CH3CN to 43% NH ₄ HCO ₃ 0.25% solution in water, 57% CH ₃ CN). The desired fractions were collected and partially concentrated in vacuo. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3x), separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo to yield compound 15 (38 mg, 41%) as a yellow sticky solid.

E12. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 16

Compound 16 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 2 for the synthesis of compound 1 using intermediate 8 (185 mg, 0.83 mmol) and intermediate 30 (180 mg, 1 mmol) as starting materials yielding compound 16 (205 mg, 83%) as a yellow oil.

El 3. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUNDS 17, 146 AND 147

Compound 17 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 2 for the synthesis of compound 1 using intermediate 9 (150 mg, 0.58 mmol) and intermediate 21 (104 mg, 0.52 mmol) as starting materials. Compound 17 was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 60% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 40% CH3CN to 43% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 57% CH3CN). The desired fractions were collected and partially concentrated in vacuo. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3x), separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo to yield compound 17 (99 mg, 41%) as a yellow sticky solid.

A purification was performed via chiral SFC (stationary phase: CHIRACEL OJ-H 5pm 250*20mm, mobile phase: 80% CO ₂ , 20% MeOH (0.3% z-PrNEE)) to deliver the two fractions: fraction A (34 mg) and fraction B (36 mg). The fractions were separately purified via Reverse phase (stationary phase: YMC-actus Triart C18 lOpm 30* 150mm, mobile phase: NH ₄ HCO ₃ (0.2%)/ϋ¾ON, gradient from 50:50 to 25:75) to afford fraction A (23 mg) and fraction B (31 mg).

HC1 (2N in Et ₂ 0, 81.5 pL, 0T6mmol) was added to a solution of fraction A (23 mg, 54.3 pmol) in Et ₂ 0 (0.17 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. The solid was filtered off, washed with Et ₂ 0 and dried to afford compound 146 (21 mg, 84%) as a white solid.

Compound 147 (25 mg, 74%) was obtained following an analogous procedure to the one reported for the synthesis of compound 146 using fraction B as starting material.

E14. PREPARATION

Compound 18 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 2 for the synthesis of compound 1 using intermediate 9 (60 mg, 0.23 mmol) and intermediate 20 (50 mg, 0.23 mmol) as starting materials. Compound 18 was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 60% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 40% CEfiCN to 43% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 57% CEfiCN). The desired fractions were collected and partially concentrated in vacuo. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3x), separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo to yield compound 18 (40 mg, 39%) as a yellow sticky solid.

E15. PREPARATION

Compound 19 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 2 for the synthesis of compound 1 using intermediate 9 (150 mg, 0.58 mmol) and intermediate 22 (104 mg, 0.52 mmol) as starting materials. Compound 19 was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 60% NH ₄ HCO ₃ 0.25% solution in water, 40% CH ₃ CN to 43% NH ₄ HCO ₃ 0.25% solution in water, 57% CH ₃ CN). The desired fractions were collected and partially concentrated in vacuo. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3x), separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo to yield compound 19 (103 mg, 42%) as a yellow sticky solid. El 6. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 20

Compound 20 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described as Method 2 for the synthesis of compound 1 using intermediate 9 (100 mg, 0.38 mmol) and intermediate 30 (86 mg, 0.46 mmol) as starting materials. Compound 20 was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 60% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 40% CH3CN to 43% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 57% CH3CN). The desired fractions were collected and partially concentrated in vacuo. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3x), separated, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo to yield compound 20 (78 mg, 47%) as a yellow sticky solid.

El 7. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 21

Ti(Oi-Pr)4 (0.19 mL, 0.65 mmol) was added to a stirred mixture of intermediate 9 (100 mg, 0.38 mmol) and intermediate 30 (85.7 mg, 0.46 mmol) in DCM (1.70 mL) at room temperature under N ₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h, cooled at 0 °C and Methylmagnesium bromide (1.4 M, 1.37 mL, 1.92 mmol) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at this temperature for 15 min and at room temperature for 2 h. The mixture was treated with NH4CI (sat., aq.) and extracted with DCM. The phases were filtered through Celite®. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM/MeOH, gradient from 100:0 to 99:1). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 60:40 to 43:57%). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents were partially concentrated in vacuo. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phases were dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to afford compound 21 (78.2 mg, 47%) as a yellow sticky solid.

El 8. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 22

Compound 22 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 21 using intermediates 7 and 30 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica; NEE (7M in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 100:0 to 98.5: 1.5). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/ CH3CN, gradient from 75 :25 to 57:43). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents were partially concentrated in vacuo. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc. the combined organic layers were dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to afford compound 22 (97.7 mg, 53%) as a yellow oil.

E19. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUNDS 23 AND 24

Compounds 23 and 24 were was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 21 using intermediates 8 and 30 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NEE (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 2:98). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo to afford a mixture of enantiomers (52 mg, 58%) as a yellow oil. The mixture was combined with another fraction (152 mg) and purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCTbCN, gradient from75:2 to 57:43). The desired fractions were collected and partially concentrated in vacuo. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3 times). The combined organic extracts were dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to afford a mixture of enantiomers (171 mg) as yellow film.

A purification was performed via chiral SFC (stationary phase: CHIRACEL OJ-H 5pm 250*20mm, mobile phase: 70% CO2, 30% EtOH (0.3% z-PrNEE)) to give compound 23 (72 mg) and another fraction (72 mg) as yellow oils.

A solution of citric acid (30.8 mg, 0.16 mmol) in l,4-dioxane (1 mL) was added to a stirred solution of the isolated fraction (64 mg, 0.16 mmol) in Et ₂ 0 (1 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. The mixture was completely dissolved in MeOH (1 mL) and evaporated in vacuo. The residue was triturated with fc/ -butylmcthylcthcr, filtered and the solid was dried under vacuum at 50 °C for 1 day to give compound 24 (85 mg, 90%) as a beige solid.

E20. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 25

Ti(Oi-Pr) ₄ (0.21 mL, 0.73 mmol) was added to a stirred mixture of intermediate 6 (100 mg, 0.49 mmol) and l,4-benzodioxan-6-carboxaldehyde (CAS: 29668-44-8; 87.5 mg, 0.53 mmol) in DCM (3.1 mL) under N ₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h. Methylmagnesium bromide (3.2M solution, 0.45 mL, 1.45 mmol) was added at 0 °C and the reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min and at room temperature. NH ₄ Cl (3 mL) was added and the mixture was diluted with water (10 mL). The aqueous phase was extracted with DCM. The combined organic layers were dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 15:85). The desired fractions were collected and solvents were concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 75:25 to 40:60). The residue (54.5 mg) was treated with HC1 (2N in Et ₂ 0). The solid was filtered off and dried to afford compound 25 (50.2 mg, 23%) as a white solid.

E21. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 26

Intermediate 20 (74.48 mg, 0.342 mmol) and K2CO3 (128.99 mg, 0.933 mmol) were added to a stirred solution of intermediate 202 (80 mg, 0.311 mmol) in CH3CN (1.606 mL). The mixture was stirred at 80 °C for 18 h. Water was added, and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The organic phase was separated, dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated under vacuum. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica; MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 10/90). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield a mixture of stereoisomers. The mixture was purified by RP HPLC (Stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 67% 0.1% NH4CO3H/NH4OH pH 9 solution in water, 33% CH3CN to 50% 0.1% NH4CO3H/NH4OH pH 9 solution in water, 50% CH3CN). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford compound 26 (69 mg, 51%) as a light yellow solid (sticky).

E22. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 27

Intermediate 30 (77.7 mg, 0.44 mmol) and Ti(0-iPr) ₄ (0.18 mL, 0.62 mmol) were added to a solution of intermediate 79 (100 mg, 0.42 mmol) in DCM (1.33 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h, cooled to 0 °C and methylmagnesium bromide (1 4M solution, 0.89 mL, 1.25 mmol) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h, quenched with NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.) and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 10:90). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCPbCN, gradient from 90: 10 to 60:40) to give compound 27 (85 mg, 49%) as a light yellow solid.

E23. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 28

2,3-Dihydro-[l,4]dioxino[2,3-b]pyridine-6-carbaldehyde (CAS: 615568-24-6; 216 mg, 1.31 mmol) and Ti(Oi-Pr) ₄ (0.96 mL, 3.27 mmol) were added to a stirred solution of intermediate 103 (240 mg, 1.09 mmol) in DCM (5.08 mL) at room temperature and under N ₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred for 16 h. The mixture was cooled at 0 °C and methylmagnesium bromide (1.4M in THF, 3.89 mL, 5.45 mmol) was added drop wise. The reaction mixture was stirred at this temperature for 25 min and at room temperature for 2 h. The mixture was treated with NH ₄ Cl (sat., aq.) and filtered through Celite®. The aqueous phase was washed with DCM. The combined organic layers were washed with H ₂ 0, dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 4:96). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield compound 28 (180 mg, 43%) as a sticky oil.

E24. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 29 2C ₆₆ H ₈₈ 0 ₇ 29

2H,3H-[l,4]Dioxino[2,3-c]pyridine-7-carbaldehyde (CAS: 443955-90-6; 62.1 mg, 0.38 mmol) and Ti(Oi-Pr)4 (0.16 mL, 0.54 mmol) were added to a solution of intermediate 6 (100 mg, 0.36 mmol) in methylmagnesium bromide (1.4M solution, 1.28 mL, 1.79 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h, cooled to 0 °C and DCM (30 uL) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h and NH4CI (sat., aq.) was added. The mixture was stirred for 10 min, basified with Na ₂ C0 ₃ (sat., aq.) and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 5:95) The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. The residue (68 mg) was dissolved in EtOAc and a solution of citric acid (35.4 mg, 0.18 mmol) dissolved in EtOAc was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature and the solid was filtered off to give compound 29 (65 mg, 24%) as a white solid.

E25. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 30

Piperonal (CAS: 120-57-0; 127 mg, 0.85 mmol) and Ti(Oi-Pr) ₄ (0.63 mL, 2.11 mmol) were added to a solution of intermediate 73 (136 mg, 0.70 mmol) in anhydrous THF (1.8 mL) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 18 h. The mixture was distilled and dried under vacuum. Anhydrous THF (1.8 mL) was added and the mixture was cooled to 0 °C. methylmagnesium bromide (1 4M in THF, 2.51 mL, 3.52 mmol) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0 °C for 15 min and at room temperature for 15 h. NH ₄ Cl (sat., aq.) was added and the mixture was extracted with DCM (3 times). The combined organic layers were dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 4:96). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. The residue (132 mg) was diluted in DCM and treated with HC1 (4N in l,4-dioxane, 1 eq). The solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The product was triturated with DIPE to give compound 30 (122 mg, 45%) as a white solid.

E26. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 31

Compound 31 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 30 using piperonal (CAS: 120-57-0) and intermediate 89 as starting materials. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 4:96). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. The residue (13 mg) was diluted in DCM and treated with HC1 (4N in 1,4- dioxane). The solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The product was triturated with DIPE to give compound 31 (7 mg, 3%) as a white solid.

E27. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 32

Sodium cyanoborohydride (18.3 mg, 0.29 mmol) was added to a stirred mixture of intermediate 6 (50.0 mg, 0.24 mmol), intermediate 128 (53.5 mg, 0.25 mmol) and Ti(0- iPr) ₄ (106 pL, 0.36 mmol) in THF (1.78 mL) at room temperature under N ₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at 70 °C for 16 h. Water was added and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH ₄ HC0 ₃ (0.25% solution in water)/CEbCN, gradient from 75:25 to 57:43) to afford compound 32 (13 mg, 13%) as an off white solid.

E28. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 33

Compound 33 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 32 using intermediate 7 and intermediate 128 as starting materials.

The residue was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH ₄ HC0 ₃ (0.25% solution in water)/ CH3CN, gradient from 75:25 to 57:43) to give compound 33 (20 mg, 21%) as an off white solid.

E29. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 34

Intermediate 144 (135 mg, 0.49 mmol) followed by Ti(Oi-Pr) ₄ (0.21 mL, 0.73 mmol) were added to a stirred solution of intermediate 6 (100 mg, 0.49 mmol) in THF (3.57 mL) at room temperature and under N ₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at 80 °C overnight. Then the mixture was cooled down to room temperature and sodium cyanoboro hydride (36.6 mg, 0.58 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 80 °C for another 24 h and diluted with water. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 5:95). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford compound 34 (85 mg, 48%) as a white solid.

E30. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 35

Intermediate 25 (79.0 mg, 0.44 mmol) and Ti(Oi-Pr) ₄ (0.18 mL, 0.62 mmol) were added to a solution of intermediate 79 (100 mg, 0.42 mmol) in DCM (2 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h, cooled to 0 °C and sodium cyanoborohydride (78.3 mg, 1.25 mmol) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h, quenched with NELC1 (sat., aq.) and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 10:90). The residue was further purified twice by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH ₄ HC0 ₃ (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 90:10 to 60:40) to yield compound 35 (35 mg, 21%) as a white solid. E31. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 36

Ti(0-iPr) ₄ (73.7 mE, 0.25 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 63 (37.0 mg, 0.17 mmol) and intermediate 1-30 (33.3 mg, 0.19 mmol) in DCM (1.08 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 7 h. Sodium triacetoxyborohydride (107 mg, 0.50 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 16 h. The mixture was diluted with NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.) and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in EtOAc, gradient from 0:100 to 3:97). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 nm 5 um), mobile phase: (0.1% NH ₄ C0 ₃ H/NH ₄ 0H pH = 9 solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 74:26 to 58:42) to give compound 36 (35 mg, 54%) as a white solid.

E32. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 37

K2CO3 (187 mg, 1.35 mmol) was added to a stirred mixture of intermediate 8 (100 mg, 0.45 mmol) and intermediate 22 (80.8 mg, 0.41 mmol) in CH3CN (3.51 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 70 °C for 20 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc and filtered through Celite®. The solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NH3 (7M in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 2:98). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo to afford compound 37 (84 mg, 48%) as a yellow oil. E33. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 38

Compound 38 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 37 using intermediate 7 and intermediate 37 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NH3 (7M in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 1 :99). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCEECN, gradient from 60:40 to 43:57). The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic extracts were dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to afford compound 38 (72.8 mg, 38%) as a yellow sticky solid. E34. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 39

Compound 39 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 37 using intermediate 41 and intermediate 20 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NEE (7m in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 1 :99). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo to afford compound 39 (138 mg, 58%) as a yellow solid. E35. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 40 Compound 40 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 37 using intermediate 6 and intermediate 124 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NH3 (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 10:90). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCEECN, gradient from 75:25 to 57:43). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in EtOAc and washed with NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.). The organic phase was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford compound 40 (13 mg, 17%) as a colourless oil.

E36. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 41

K2CO3 (216 mg, 1.56 mmol) was added to a stirred mixture of intermediate 89 (100 mg, 0.52 mmol) and intermediate 21 (104 mg, 0.52 mmol) in CH3CN (78.8 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 70 °C for 12 h and diluted with water. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH ₄ HC0 ₃ (0.25% solution in water)/ CH3CN, gradient from 80:20 to 60:40). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo to afford compound 41 (35 mg, 19%) as a colorless oil. This fraction was taken into DCM and treated with leq of HC1 4N in dioxane (0.1 ml). The solvents were evaporated in vacuo and the product was tritured with diethyl ether to afford compound 41 (125 mg, 36%) as a white solid.

E37. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 42 Compound 42 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 95*TFA and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCTbCN, gradient from 54:46 to 36:64).

The residue (56 mg) was suspended in Et ₂ 0 and treated with HC1 (2N solution in Et ₂ 0, 4 eq) at room temperature. The white precipitate was filtered off and dried to afford compound 42 (29.6 mg, 17%) as a white solid.

E38. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 43

Compound 43 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 71 and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 80:20 to 0: 100). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo.

The residue (123.7 mg) was suspended in Et ₂ 0 and treated with HC1 (2N solution in Et ₂ 0, 4 eq) at room temperature. The white precipitate was filtered off and dried to afford compound 43 (123.1 mg, 50%) as a white solid.

E39. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 44

Compound 44 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 91 and intermediate 21 as starting materials. The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: XBridge Cl 8 50 x 100 mm, 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCTbCN, gradient from 80:20 to 0:100). The desired fractions were collected and the volatiles were evaporated in vacuo to afford a brown oil (346 mg).

A fraction of the residue (322 mg) was suspended in Et ₂ 0 and treated with HC1 (2N solution in Et ₂ 0, 4 eq) at room temperature. The white precipitate was filtered off and dried to give compound 44 (305 mg) as a pale-cream solid.

E40. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 45

Compound 45 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 67 and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 80:20 to 0:100). The desired fractions were evaporated in vacuo a pale yellow oil (121 mg).

The residue (113 mg) was suspended in Et ₂ 0 and treated with HC1 (2N solution in Et ₂ 0, 4 eq) at room temperature. The white precipitate was filtered off and dried to give compound 45 (131.9 mg, 39%) as a pale-cream solid.

E41. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 46

Compound 46 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 69 and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 80:20 to 0:100). The desired fractions were evaporated in vacuo to afford a colorless oil (112.6 mg).

The residue (105 mg) was suspended in Et ₂ 0 and treated with HC1 (2N solution in Et ₂ 0, 4 eq) at room temperature. The white precipitate was filtered off and dried to give compound 46 (117 mg, 39%) as a pale-cream solid.

E42. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 47

Compound 47 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 108 and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCEECN, gradient from 80:20 to 0:100). The desired fractions were evaporated in vacuo to afford a colorless oil (97 mg).

The residue (76 mg) was suspended in Et ₂ 0 and treated with HC1 (2N solution in Et ₂ 0, 4 eq) at room temperature. The white precipitate was filtered off and dried to give compound 47 (74 mg, 21%) as a pale-cream solid. E43. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 48

Compound 48 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 45 and intermediate 20 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 80:20 to 0:100). The desired fractions were evaporated in vacuo to give compound 48 (148 mg, 71%) as a colorless oil which solidified upon standing. E44. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 49

Compound 49 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 47 and intermediate 20 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCFFCN, gradient from 80:20 to 0: 100). The desired fractions were evaporated in vacuo to give compound 49 (43 mg, 17%) as a colorless oil.

E45. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 50

Compound 50 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 53 and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 0: 100). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 80:20 to 0: 100). The residue was washed with EtOAc and NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.). The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo to afford compound 50 (92 mg, 56%) as a pale yellow oil.

E46. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 51 Compound 51 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 55 and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 0:100). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCTbCN, gradient from 80:20 to 0:100). Another purification by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 80:20 to 0:100) delivered compound 51 (101 mg, 62%) as a pale yellow oil.

E47. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 52

Compound 52 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 57 and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 0:100). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 80:20 to 0:100). The organic layer was evaporated in vacuo and the aqueous phase was washed with EtOAc and NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.). The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo to afford compound 52 (135 mg, 84%) as a colorless film.

E48. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUNDS 53 AND 54 Compounds 52 and 53 were prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 8 and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NFT (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 2:98). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo to afford a mixture of products (160 mg). A purification was performed via chiral SFC (stationary phase: CHIRACEL OJ-H 5 pm 250*20mm, mobile phase: 75% C0 ₂ , 25% EtOH (0.3% i-PrNEE)) to give compound 53 (65 mg, 23%) and compound 54 (66 mg, 23%) as yellow oils.

E49. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 55

Compound 55 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 7 and intermediate 20 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NFT (7M in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 5:95). A second purification was performed by flash column chromatography (silica, NFT (7M in MeOFF)/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 2:98). The residue was further purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryGTCN, gradient from75:25 to 57:43). The desired fractions were collected and partially concentrated in vacuo. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3 times), dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to afford a colorless oil (102 mg). A purification was performed via chiral SFC (stationary phase: CHIRACEL OJ-H 5pm 250*20mm, mobile phase: 90% C0 ₂ , 10% EtOH (0.3% /-PrNH ₂ )) to afford 2 fractions: fraction A (44 mg) and fraction B (44 mg).

Fraction A (44 mg) was dissolved in Et ₂ 0 (1 mL) and HC1 (2N in Et ₂ 0, 0.8 mL) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h and the solvent was concentrated in vacuo tert- Butyl methyl ether was added and the mixture was sonicated for 10 min. The solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The process was repeated until the obtention of a solid (50 mg). The product was further purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCTbCN, gradient from 75:25 to 57:43). The desired fractions were collected and partially concentrated in vacuo. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (3 times), dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to give compound 55 (17.2 mg) as colorless oil.

E50. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 56

Compound 56 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 6 and intermediate 133 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from85:l5 to 55:45).

HC1 (2N in Et ₂ 0, 0.12 mL, 0.24 mmol) was added to a solution of the residue (30 mg) in Et20 (0.26 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min. The solid was filtered off, washed with Et ₂ 0 and dried to afford compound 56 (25 mg, 44%) as a white solid.

E51. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 57

Compound 57 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 6 and intermediate 20 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH ₄ HCO ₃ (0.25% solution in water)/ CH ₃ CN, gradient from 70:30 to 35:65). The residue was purified again by using an Isolute® SCX-2 cartridge which was washed with MeOH and the product was eluted with NH3 (7N in MeOH) and the fraction was evaporated in vacuo.

HC1 (2N in Et ₂ 0, 0.21 mL, 0.42 mmol) was added to a solution of the residue (55 mg) in Et ₂ 0 (0.45 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min. The solid was filtered off, washed with Et ₂ 0, and dried to give compound 57 (55 mg, 56%) as a white solid.

E52. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 58

Compound 58 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 6 and intermediate 136 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCEECN, gradient from 85:15 to 55:45).

The product was converted into the corresponding HC1 salt. HC1 (2N in Et ₂ 0, 0.49 mL, 0.98 mmol) was added to a solution of the residue (115 mg) in Et ₂ 0 (1 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min. The solid was filtered off, washed with Et ₂ 0, and dried to give compound 58 (135 mg, 66%) as a white solid.

E53. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 59

Compound 59 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 105 and intermediate 20 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM/MeOH, gradient from 100:0 to 95:5). A second purification was performed by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM/EtOAc, gradient from 50:50 to 0: 100). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo.

The product (123 mg) was dissolved in Et ₂ 0 and HC1 (~5M in /-PrOH) was added. The solid was filtered off and dried under vacuum at 50 °C for 3 days to give compound 59 (122 mg, 46%) as a white solid.

E54. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUNDS 60, 61 AND 62

Compounds 60, 61 and 62 were prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 6 and intermediate 147 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 5:95). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo to afford an oil (167 mg).

A fraction of the residue (35 mg) was diluted in Et ₂ 0 (2 mL) and treated with HC1 (1M in Et ₂ 0, 0.1 mL, 0.1 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 30 min at room temperature. The white solid was filtered off to give compound 60 (30 mg) as a white solid.

Another fraction of the residue was purified via chiral SFC (stationary phase: CHIRALPAK AD-H 5 pm 250*30mm, mobile phase: 80% C0 ₂ , 20% EtOH (0.3% i- PrNH ₂ ) to give 2 fractions: fraction A (52 mg) and fraction B (53 mg).

Fraction A (52 mg, 0.l5mmol) was diluted in Et ₂ 0 (15 uL) and treated with HC1 (1M in Et ₂ 0, 0.15 mL, 0.15 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min. The solid was filtered off to give compound 61 (50.6 mg) as a solid. Compound 62 (47.8 mg) was prepared following an analogous procedure using fraction B as starting material.

E55. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 63

Compound 63 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 20 and intermediate 87 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 10:90). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: (0.1% NH ₄ CO ₃ H/NH ₄ OH pH 9 solution in water)/CH ₃ CN, gradient from 67:33 to 50:50). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford compound 63 (149 mg, 85%).

E56. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 64

Compound 64 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 21 and intermediate 87 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 10:90). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: (0.1% NH ₄ CO ₃ H/NH ₄ OH pH 9 solution in water)/CH ₃ CN, gradient from 67:33 to 50:50). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford compound 64 (198 mg, 59%) as a light yellow solid.

E57. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 65

Compound 65 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 20 and intermediate 79 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 10:90). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: (0.1% NH4CO3H/NH4OH pH 9 solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 67:33 to 50:50). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford compound 65 (74 mg, 42%) as a light yellow solid.

E58. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 66

Compound 66 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 21 and intermediate 79 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 10:90). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: (0.1% NH4CO3H/NH4OH pH 9 solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 67:33 to 50:50). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford compound 66 (98 mg, 58%) as a light yellow solid.

E59. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 67 Compound 67 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 21 and intermediate 81 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 10:90). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: (0.1% NH ₄ CO ₃ H/NH ₄ OH pH 9 solution in water)/CH ₃ CN, gradient from 67:33 to 50:50). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford compound 67 (214 mg, 61%) as a light yellow solid.

E60. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 68

Compound 68 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 21 and intermediate 83 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 10:90). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: (0.1% NH ₄ CO ₃ H/NH ₄ OH pH 9 solution in water)/CH ₃ CN, gradient from 67:33 to 50:50). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford compound 68 (118 mg, 71%) as a light yellow solid.

E61. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 69

Compound 69 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 41 using intermediate 21 and intermediate 85 as starting materials. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 10:90). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: (0.1% NH ₄ CO ₃ H/NH ₄ OH pH 9 solution in water)/CH ₃ CN, gradient from 67:33 to 50:50). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford compound 69 (105 mg, 61%) as a light yellow solid.

E62. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 70

Intermediate 65 (80.9 mg, 0.42 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous CH ₃ CN (3.16 mL). intermediate 1-21 (80.0 mg, 0.40 mmol) and K ₂ CO ₃ (166 mg, 1.20 mmol) were added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 80 °C overnight. The mixture was diluted with water and the mixture was extracted with DCM. The combined organic extracts were dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified twice by flash column chromatography (silica, NH ₃ (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 10:90). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. Another purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH ₄ HCO ₃ (0.25% solution in water)/CH ₃ CN, gradient from 67:33 to 50:50). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in EtOAc and washed with NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.). The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford a dark oil (44.5 mg).

HC1 (6M in z-PrOH, 95.6 pL, 0.57 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of the residue (34 mg) in Et ₂ 0 (0.1 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h and concentrated in vacuo. A/t- Butyl methyl ether was added and the mixture was sonicated. The solvent was removed in vacuo. The proccess was repeated until the obtention of a solid which was dried under vacuum at 50 °C for 72 h to give compound 70 (40 mg, 98%) as a white solid. E63. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 71

Compound 71 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 70 using intermediate 49 and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified twice by flash column chromatography (silica, NEE (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 10:90). Another purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCEECN, gradient from 80:20 to 0:100). The residue was dissolved in EtOAc and washed with NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.). The organic phase was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford compound 71 (78.9 mg, 43%) as a white solid.

E64. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 72

Compound 72 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 70 using intermediate 51 and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified twice by flash column chromatography (silica, NEE (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 10:90). Another purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 80:20 to 0:100), The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in EtOAc and washed with NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.). The organic phase was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give compound 72 (79.9 mg, 61%) as a colorless oil. E65. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 73

Compound 73 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 70 using intermediate 114 and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NEE (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 10:90). Another purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/ CH3CN, gradient from 54:46 to 36:64). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in EtOAc and washed with NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.). The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give compound 73 (27 mg, 17%) as a colorless oil.

E66 PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 74

Compound 74 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 70 using intermediate 75 and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NH3 (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 10:90). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give compound 74 (35 mg, 39%) as a light yellow oil.

E67. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 75

Compound 75 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 70 using intermediate 93 and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude mixture was combined with another fraction (0.15 mmol) and purified by Prep HPLC (Column Boston Prime C18 150*30mm 5mhi, mobile phase: water (0.05% ammonia hydroxide v/v)/CH3CN). The pure fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to afford compound 75 (145.4 mg, 59%) as white solid.

E68. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 76

Compound 76 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 70 using intermediate 97 and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NH3 (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 5:95). The residue was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 nm 5 um), mobile phase: (0.1% NH4CO3H/NH4OH pH = 9 solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 74:26 to 58:42)) to afford compound 76 (60.3 mg, 34%) as a yellow oil which was became solid by adding Et ₂ 0.

E69. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 77

Compound 77 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 70 using intermediate 99 and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NH3 (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 5:95) to afford compound 77 (49.1 mg, 28%) as a brown oil. E70. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 78

Compound 78 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 70 using intermediate 101 and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NFU (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 5:95) to afford compound 78 (75.9 mg, 29%) as a yellow oil.

71. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 79

Compound 79 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 70 using intermediate 8 and intermediate 130 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 5:95). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give compound 79 (165 mg, 75%) as a yellow oil. E72. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUNDS 80 AND 81

A purification of compound 79 was performed via chiral SFC (stationary phase: Chiralcel OD-H 5 pm 250x21.2mm, mobile phase: 75% C0 ₂ , 25% z-PrOH (0.3% /-PrNH ₂ )) to deliver 2 fractions: fraction A (70 mg) and fraction B (72 mg).

Fraction A (35 mg, 84 umol) was dissolved in Et ₂ 0 (1.75 mL) and HC1 (2N in Et ₂ 0, 0.13 mL, 0.26 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred for 5 min and filtered to give compound 80 (25 mg, 66%) as a white solid.

Compound 81 (47.4 mg) was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for compound 80 using fraction B (60 mg) as starting material.

E73. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUNDS 82 AND 83

Compounds 82 and 83 were prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 70 using intermediate 6 and intermediate 130 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NFL (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 5:95). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. A purification performed via chiral SFC (Stationary phase: CHIRALCEL OD-H 5pm 250*30mm, Mobile phase: 70% C0 ₂ , 30% iPrOH(0.3% iPrNH ₂ ) delivered 2 fractions: fraction A (56 mg) and fraction B (60 mg).

Fraction A (56 mg) was dissolved in Et ₂ 0 and HC1 (2N in Et ₂ 0) was added. The mixture was stirred for 5 min and filtered to give compound 82 (48 mg, 19%) as a white solid. Fraction B was converted into compound 83 (48 mg) following an analogous procedure.

E74. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 84

Compound 84 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 70 using intermediate 59 and intermediate 20 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NFT (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 5:95). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 nm 5 um), mobile Phase: (0.1% NH ₄ CO ₃ H/NH ₄ OH pH = 9 solution in water)/CH ₃ CN, gradient from 74:26 to 58:42) to afford a colorless oil (135 mg).

To a fraction of the residue (30 mg) in Et ₂ 0 was added HC1 (2N in Et ₂ 0). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h and the solid was filtered off to give compound 84 (22 mg).

E75. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUNDS 85 AND 86

Compounds 85 and 86 were prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 70 using intermediate 43 and intermediate 20 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 5:95). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents evaporated in vacuo to afford a yellow solid. The solid was taken up in MeOH and the product was filtered off to give a white solid (124 mg). The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH ₄ HCO ₃ (0.25% solution in water)/CH ₃ CN, gradient from 75:25 to 40:60) to afford a white solid (28.3 mg).

The solid (124 mg) was purified via chiral SFC (stationary phase: CHIRACEL OJ-H 5pm 250*20mm, mobile phase: 75% C0 ₂ , 25% MeOH (0.3% i-PrNH ₂ )) to deliver 2 fractions: fraction A (60 mg) and fraction B (56 mg). The fractions were independently purified via preparative LC (stationary phase: irregular bare silica, mobile phase: 0.1% NH ₄ OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH) to give compound 85 (19 mg, 4%) and compound 86 (23 mg, 5%).

E76. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 87

Compound 87 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 70 using intermediate 59 and intermediate 20 as starting materials.

The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 5:95) to give compound 87 (81.7 mg, 51%) as a white solid.

E77. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 88

Compound 88 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 70 using intermediate 61 and intermediate 20 as starting materials.

The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM/MeOH, gradient from 100:0 to 95:5) to afford a colorless oil (44.6 mg).

The residue (44.6 mg, 0.12 mmol) was dissolved in Et ₂ 0 (0.3 mL) and HC1 (2M in Et ₂ 0, 0.17 mL, 0.34 mmol) was added under stirring. The precipitate was filtered and the product was dried under vacuum for 48 h at room temperature to give compound 88 (45 mg, 92%) as a white solid.

E78. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 89

Compound 89 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 70 using intermediate 93*2HCl and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by prep. HPLC (column: Boston Prime C18 150*30mm 5mhi, mobile phase: water (0.05% ammonia hydroxide v/v)- CH3CN) to afford compound 89 (60.1 mg, 57%) as a white solid.

E79. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 90

Intermediate 21 (169 mg, 0.85 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 73 (136 mg, 0.70 mmol) and K ₂ CO ₃ (195 mg, 1.41 mmol) in CH ₃ CN (5 mL) at room temperature and the reaction mixture was stirred at 75 °C for 48 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 4:96). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford a colorless oil (136 mg).

The residue (136 mg) was diluted with DCM and treated with HC1 (4N in l,4-dioxane, 1 eq). The solvents were evaporated in vacuo and the product was triturated with DIPE to afford compound 90 (131 mg, 47%) as a white solid. E80. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 91

Compound 91 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 90 using intermediate 73 and intermediate 20 as starting materials.

The crude product purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 4:96). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. The product was triturated with Et ₂ 0 to afford a colorless oil (78 mg). The residue (78 mg) was diluted with DCM and treated with HC1 (4N in l,4-dioxane, 1 eq). The solvents were evaporated in vacuo and the product was triturated with DIPE to give compound 91 (80 mg, 29%) as a white solid.

E81. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 92

Intermediate 20 (548 mg, 2.52 mmol) and K2CO3 (1.16 g, 8.40 mmol) were added to a stirred solution of intermediate 43 (673 mg, 2.80 mmol) in anhydrous CH3CN (10 mL) and DMF (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 70 °C for 20 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc and filtered through Celite®. The solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NEE (7M in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 2:98). The desired fractions were collected and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo to afford compound 92 (227 mg, 21%) as a white solid.

E82. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 93

A solution of citric acid (73.4 mg, 0.38 mmol) in l,4-dioxane (1.22 mL) was added to a solution of compound 72 (71.0 mg, 0.19 mmol) in Et ₂ 0 (3.6 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 72 h. The precipitated was filtered off and washed with Et ₂ 0. The solid was dissolved in MeOH and Et ₂ 0 was added. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was dried at 50 °C for 3 days. The residue was treated with NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.) and extracted with EtOAc and THF (8 :2). The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The product was dissolved in Et ₂ 0 (0.2 ml) and HC1 (7N in IP A, 0.2 mL) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 h. tert- Butyl methyl ether was added and the mixture was sonicated. The solvent was concentrated under in vacuo. The process was repeated until the obtention of a solid. The later was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCEECN, gradient from 90: 10 to 65:35). The fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. The product was dissolved in EtOAc and washed with NaHCCh (sat., aq.). The organic phase was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give compound 93 (24 mg, 35%). E83. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 94

A mixture of intermediate 89 (300 mg, 1.56 mmol), intermediate 20 (339 mg, 1.56 mmol) and DIPEA (1.08 mL, 6.24 mmol) in anhydrous CEbCN (6 mL) was stirred at 70 °C for 20 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH/DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 5:95) to afford a yellow oil (174 mg, 30 %).

The yellow oil was combined with another batch and the residue (298 mg) was dissolved in Et ₂ 0 (2.02 mL) and HC1 (2M in Et ₂ 0, 1.20 mL, 2.40 mmol, 3 eq) was added under stirring. The resulting precipitate was filtered off and dried under vacuum for 48 h at room temperature to give compound 94 (315 mg, 96%) as a white solid.

E84. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 95

Compound 95 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 94 using intermediate 73 and intermediate 36 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 5:95). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo to give compound 95 (193 mg, 42%) as a yellow oil which became a light yellow solid after treatment with Et ₂ 0. E85. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 96

To a mixture of NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 22.7 mg, 0.57 mmol) in DMF (0.84 mL) at 0 °C were added intermediate 116 (50.0 mg, 0.19 mmol) and 15 -crown-5 (37.8 pL, 0.23 mmol). Then 2-bromo-5-(trifluoromethoxy)pyridine (CAS: 888327-36-4; 64.1 mg, 0.27 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 80 °C for 16 h. The mixture was cooled down and diluted with water. The solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCEECN, gradient from 90:10 to 0:100). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase:

Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 60:40 to 25:75) to afford compound 96 (15 mg, 19%) as a yellow oil. E86. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 97

Compound 97 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 96 using intermediate 116 and 6-chloro-5- methylnicotinonitrile (CAS: 66909-33-9) as starting materials.

The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 3:97). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 60:40 to 25:75) to afford compound 97 (8 mg, 11%) as a colorless oil.

E87. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 98 Compound 98 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for compound 96 using intermediate 116 and 4-bromo-3-methoxypyridine (CAS: 109911- 38-8) as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCTbCN, gradient from 85: 15 to 60:40) to afford compound 98 (8 mg, 11%) as a colorless oil.

E88. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 99

Compound 99 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for compound 96 using intermediate 116 and 2-bromo-5-methoxypyridine (CAS: 105170- 27-2) as starting materials.

The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NEE (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 97:3). The residue was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 75:25 to 40:60) to give compound 99 (8 mg, 19%) as a colorless oil.

E89. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 100 100

NaO/Bu (54.5 mg, 0.57 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediatel 16 (50.0 mg, 0.19 mmol) in CH ₃ CN (1.33 mL) in a sealed tube and N ₂ atmosphere. 6-Chloro-2- methylnicotinonitrile (CAS: 66909-36-2; 40.4 mg, 0.27 mmol) was slowly added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 60 °C for 16 h. The mixture was diluted with water and stirred for 15 min. Solvents were concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NH3 (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 3:97). The residue was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 75:25 to 40:60) to afford compound 100 (38.2 mg, 53%) as a light yellow solid. E90. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 101 101

Compound 101 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 100 using intermediate 116 and 6-chloro-4- methylnicotinonitrile (CAS: 66909-35-1) as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, NEE (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 3:97). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 75:25 to 40:60) to give compound 101 (37.4 mg, 52%) as a light yellow solid.

E91. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 102 102

Compound 102 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 100 using intermediate 116 and 6-chloro-5- methoxynicotinonitrile (CAS: 125683-79-6) as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridgeO 50 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 64:36 to 47:53) to give compound 102 (8.2 mg, 11%) as a solid.

E92. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 103 103

Compound 103 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 100 using intermediate 116 and 6-chloro-4- methoxynicotinonitrile (CAS: 1187190-69-7) as starting materials. The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 50 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCTbCN, gradient from 64:36 to 47:53) to give compound 103 (9.8 mg, 13%) as a solid. E93. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 104

Compound 104 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 100 using intermediate 116 and 4-bromopyridine-3- carbonitrile (CAS: 154237-70-4) as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM/MeOH, gradient from 100:0 to 97:3). The residue was purified by using an Isolute® SCX-2 cartridge which was washed with MeOH and the product was eluted with NEE (7N in MeOH). The fraction was concentrated in vacuo to afford compound 104 (30 mg, 43%) as a yellow solid.

E94. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 105 105

Compound 105 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 100 using intermediate 116 and 6-chloro-5- fluoronicotinonitrile (CAS: 102025-31-0) as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 67:33 to 50:50) to give compound 105 (15.8 mg, 36%) as a yellow oil.

E95. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 106 106 Compound 106 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 100 using intermediate 118 and 6-chloro-5- pyridiazinecarbonitrile (CAS: 35857-89-7) as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM/MeOH, gradient from 100:0 to 95:5) to afford compound 106 (44.2 mg, 60%) as a yellow solid.

E96. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 107 107

NaO/Bu (30.5 mg, 0.32 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 118 (70.0 mg, 0.27 mmol) in CEbCN (1.87 mL) under N ₂ atmosphere. 6-Chloro-5- pyridiazinecarbonitrile (CAS: 35857-89-7; 51.7 mg, 0.37 mmol) was slowly added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h. Water was added and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc (2 x 10 mL). The combined organic layers were dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM/MeOH, gradient from 100:0 to 95:5; NFT (7N in MeOH)/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 5:95). The residue was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 90:10 to 60:40) to afford compound 107 (10 mg, 10%) as a yellow oil.

E97. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 108

To a mixture of intermediate 116 (50.0 mg, 0.19 mmol) in CH ₃ CN (2 mL) under N ₂ atmosphere was added NaO/Bu (36.4 mg, 0.38 mmol). 2-Chloro-3-methoxypyrazine (CAS: 40155-28-0; 38.3 mg, 0.27 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at 80 °C for 16 h. The mixture was diluted with water at 0 °C and extracted with DCM. The combined organic layers were dried, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 75:25 to 40:60) to give compound 108 (36.3 mg, 52%) as a white solid.

E98. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 109 109

Compound 109 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 108 using intermediate 119 and 2-chloro-6-methylpyrazine (CAS: 38557-71-0) as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCEECN, gradient from 75:25 to 40:60) to give compound 109 (48 mg, 61%) as a white solid.

E99. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 110 110

Compound 110 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 108 using intermediate 119 and 5-chloro-2,3- dimethylpyrazine (CAS: 182500-28-3) as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 75:25 to 40:60) to give compound 110 (12 mg, 15%) as a yellow oil.

El 00. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 111 111

Compound 111 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 108 using intermediate 119 and 2-chloro-3-methylpyrazine (CAS: 95-58-9) as starting materials. The crude product was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCTbCN, gradient from 75:25 to 40:60) to afford a colorless oil (45.1 mg).

The residue (45.1 mg, 0.12 mmol) was dissolved in Et ₂ 0 (0.3 mL) and HC1 (2M in Et ₂ 0, 0.18 mL, 0.36 mmol) was added under stirring. The resulting precipitate was filtered and the product was dried under vacuum for 48 h at room temperature to deliver compound 111 (41.4 mg, 84%) as a white solid.

E101. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 112 112

To a mixture of intermediate 119 (50.0 mg, 0.18 mmol) in CH3CN (1.25 mL) was added NaO/Bu (51.1 mg, 0.53 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 min and 6-chloro-3-methylnicotinonitrile (CAS: 66909-36-2; 40.5 mg, 0.27 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 60 °C for 72 h. The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 5:95). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo. A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 80:20 to 0:100) to give compound 112 (37 mg, 52%) as a yellow solid.

El 02. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 113 113

Compound 113 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 112 using intermediate 119 and 6-chloro-4- methylnicotinonitrile (CAS: 66909-35-1) as starting materials.

The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 5:95). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 80:20 to 0:100) to give compound 113 (17 mg, 24%) as a yellow solid.

El 03. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 114 114

NaO/Bu (32.7 mg, 0.34 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 116 (30.0 mg, 0.11 mmol) in anhydrous CEbCN (0.8 mL) in a sealed tube and under N ₂ atmosphere. 2- Chloro-5-(trifluoromethyl)pyrazine (CAS: 799557-87-2; 29.0 mg, 0.16 mmol) was slowly added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 80 °C for 16 h and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (Na ₂ S0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 5:95). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford compound 114 (15.3 mg, 33%).

El 04. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 115 115

DBAD (CAS: 870-50-8; 43.6 mg, 0.19 mmol) was added to a stirred mixture of intermediate 116 (20.0 mg, 75.7 pmol), 5-fluoro-2-hydroxypyridine (CAS: 51173-05-8; 21.4 mg, 0.19 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (49.6 mg, 0.19 mmol) in THF (0.36 mL) at room temperature under N ₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred for 16 h and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCEECN, gradient from 67:33 to 50:50) to afford compound 115 (10 mg, 37%) as a colorless oil. El 05. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 116

Compound 116 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 115 using intermediate 116 and 3-hydroxy-2-methylpyridine (CAS: 1121-25-1) as starting materials.

The crude mixture was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 50 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCEECN, gradient from 90:10 to 60:40) to give compound 116 (16 mg, 24%) as a colorless oil. E 106. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 117 117

Compound 117 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 115 using intermediate 119 and 5-fluoropyridin-3-ol (CAS: 209328-55-2) as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 5:95). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo. A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 80:20 to 0:100) to afford compound 117 (33 mg, 49%) as a white sticky solid.

El 07. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 118

Compound 118 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 115 using intermediate 116 and 3-hydroxy-2-methylpyridine (CAS: 1121-25-1) as starting materials. The crude mixture was purified by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 50 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in wateryCTbCN, gradient from 90:10 to 60:40) to afford compound 118 (16 mg, 24%) as a colorless oil. E 108. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 119 119

2-Propylzinc bromide solution (0.5M, 2.12 mL, 1.06 mmol) was added to a mixture of compound 67 (100 mg, 0.27 mmol) and Pd(/-Bu ₃ P)2 (13.6 mg, 26.5 pmol) in THF (1 mL) under N ₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at 65 °C for 18 h, treated with a mixture of NH ₄ Cl (sat., aq.) and NH4OH (1 :1) and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was separated, dried (MgS04), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH/DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 5:95). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 85:15 to 55:45) to yield compound 119

(62 mg, 61%) as a colorless film.

E109. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 120 120

Compound 120 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 119 using compound 67 and a cyclopropylzinc bromide solution.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 5:95). A second purification was performed by RP HPLC (stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm), mobile phase: NH4HCO3 (0.25% solution in water)/CH3CN, gradient from 85:15 to 55:45) to afford compound 120 (20 mg, 33%) as a colorless oil. El 10. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 121 121

PdCl ₂ (dppf) (16.2 mg, 22.1 umol) andNa ₂ C0 ₃ (sat., aq.) were added to a stirred mixture of intermediate 188 (100 mg, 0.22 mmol) and methylboronic acid (66.2 mg, 1.11 mmol) in 1 ,4-dioxane (1.72 mL). The reaction mixture was purged with N ₂ for 5 min and stirred at 150 °C for 30 min under microwave irradiation. The mixture was cooled down, washed with H ₂ 0 and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in heptane, gradient from 0:100 to 15:85). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield compound 121 (45 mg, 52%) as a as a white solid.

El 11. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 122

HATU (CAS: 148893-10-1; 60.1 mg, 0.16 mmol) was added to a stirred mixture of intermediate 193 and DIPEA (82.6 pL, 0.47 mmol) in DMF (4.89 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min and methylamine hydrochloride (10.7 mg, 0.16 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 h. The mixture was diluted with NaHC0 ₃ (sat., aq.) and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 50:50). A second purification was performed by reverse phase chromatography ([25mM NH ₄ HC0 ₃ ]/[MeCN: MeOH 1 :1], gradient from 75:25 to 38:62). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give compound 122 (29 mg, 46%) as a white solid. El 12. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 123

Compound 123 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one reported for the synthesis of compound 122 using intermediate 194 and diisopropylamine as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by reverse phase chromatography ([25mM NH ₄ HC0 ₃ ]/[CH ₃ CN/Me0H, 1 :1], gradient from 59:41 to 17:83). A second purification was performed by reverse phase chromatography ([25mM NH ₄ HC0 ₃ ]/[MeCN/Me0H, 1 :1]), gradient from 59:41 to 17:83). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give a colorless oil (21 mg).

The residue (21 mg) was diluted with DCM and treated with HC1 (4N in l,4-dioxane, 2 eq). The solvents were evaporated in vacuo and the product was triturated with DIPE to yield compound 123 (11 mg, 8%) and as a white solid. E 113. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 124

Intermediate 21 (100 mg, 0.51 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 198 (104 mg, 0.42 mmol) and K2CO3 (115 mg, 0.84 mmol) in CH3CN (5 mL) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at 75 °C for 48 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the crude product was purified by reverse phase flash column chromatography ([65mM NH ₄ OAC/CH ₃ CN, 90:lO]/[CH ₃ CN/MeOH, 1 :1], gradient from 70:30 to 27:73). A second purification was performed by flash column chromatography (silica, EtOAc in heptane, gradient from 0/100 to 100/0) to afford a colorless oil (30 mg).

The residue (30 mg) was taken into DCM and treated with HC1 (4N in l,4-dioxane, 1 eq). The solvents were evaporated in vacuo and the product was triturated with Et ₂ 0 to give compound 124 (20 mg, 10%) as a white solid. El 14. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 125

Intermediate 21 (150 mg, 0.75 mmol) was added to a stirred mixture of intermediate 156 (149 mg, 0.58 mmol) and K2CO3 (160 mg, 1.16 mmol) in CH3CN (7.3 mL) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at 75 °C for 16 h. Additional quantity of intermediate 21 (34.6 mg, 0.17 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at 75 °C for another 16 h The reaction was quenched with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by reverse phase ([25mM NH ₄ HC0 ₃ ]/[CH ₃ CN/Me0H, 1 : 1], gradient from 59:41 to 17:83). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford a colorless oil (120 mg).

The residue (120 mg) was dissolved in DCM and treated with HC1 (4N in l,4-dioxane, 1 eq). The solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The product was triturated with Et ₂ 0 to afford compound 125 (79.5 mg, 32%) as a white solid.

El 15. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 126 126

Compound 126 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 125 using intermediate 20 and intermediate 162 as starting materials.

The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM in MeOH, gradient from 0: 100 to 10:90). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in Et ₂ 0 and concentrated in vacuo. The product was triturated in heptane, filtered and dried to give compound 126 (107 mg, 49%) as a white solid. El 16. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 127

Compound 127 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 125 using intermediate 20 and intermediate 164 as starting materials.

The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, DCM in MeOH, gradient from 0:100 to 10:90). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in Et ₂ 0 and concentrated in vacuo. The product was triturated with DIPE, filtered and dried to give compound 127 (106.7 mg, 48%) as a white solid.

El 17. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 128 128

Compound 128 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 125 using intermediate 20 and intermediate 160 as starting materials.

The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 0:100, DCM/MeOH, gradient from 80:20 to 60:40). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. A second purification was performed by reverse phase (Phenomenex Gemini Cl 8 100x30mm 5 pm; [25mM

NH ₄ HC0 ₃ ]/[CH ₃ CN/Me0H, 1 :1), gradient from 59:41 to 17:83). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give compound 128 (98.4 mg, 54%) as a white foam. E 118. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 129 129 Compound 129 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 125 using intermediate 21 and intermediate 201 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by reverse flash column chromatography (silica, [25mM NH ₄ HC0 ₃ ]/[CH ₃ CN/Me0H 1 :1], gradient from 70:30 to 27:73).

The residue (60 mg) was combined with another fraction and dissolved in DCM. The mixture was treated with HC1 (4N in l,4-dioxane, 1 eq.). The solvents were evaporated in vacuo and the product was triturated with DIPE and filtered to deliver compound 129 as a white solid.

El 19. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 130

Compound 130 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 125 using intermediate 21 and intermediate 167 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, [DCM/MeOH 9:l]/DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 100:0). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give a colorless oil (25.8 mg).

The residue (25.8 mg) was taken into DCM and treated with HC1 (4N in l,4-dioxane, 1 eq). The solvents were evaporated in vacuo to afford compound 130 (19 mg, 8%) as a white solid.

E120. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 131

Compound 131 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 125 using intermediate 21 and intermediate 178 as starting materials. The crude product was purified by reverse flash column chromatography ([65mM NH ₄ OAc/CH ₃ CN, 90:10]/[CH3 CN/MeOH, 1 :1], gradient from 72:28 to 36:64). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give a colorless oil (47 mg). The residue (47 mg) was taken into DCM and treated with HC1 (4N in l,4-dioxane, 1 eq). The solvents were evaporated in vacuo to afford compound 131 (20 mg, 15%) as a white solid.

E 121. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 132

Compound 132 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 125 using intermediate 21 and intermediate 182 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by reverse flash column chromatography ([65mM NEEOAc/CEbCN, 90:lO]/[CH ₃ CN/MeOH 1 :1], gradient from 81 :19 to 45:55). A second purification was performed by reverse flash column chromatography ([25mM NH ₄ HC0 ₃ ]/[CH ₃ CN/Me0H 1 :1], gradient from 81 : 19 to 45:55). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. The product was triturated with Et ₂ 0 to afford a colorless oil (32.9 mg).

The residue (32.9 mg) was taken into DCM and treated with HC1 (4N in l,4-dioxane, 1 eq). The solvents were evaporated in vacuo to afford compound 132 (20 mg, 19%) as a white powder.

El 22. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 133

Compound 133 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 125 using intermediate 20 and intermediate 184 as starting materials. The crude product was purified by reverse phase flash column chromatography (silica, NH ₃ in MeOH (5%) in DCM, gradient from 0:100 to 10:90). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give compound 133 (75 mg, 49%) as a pale white solid.

El 23.PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 134

134

Compound 134 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 125 using intermediate 20 and intermediate 169 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by reverse phase flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 60:40). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford compound 134 (55 mg, 52%) as a yellowish oil.

El 24. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUNDS 135, 136 AND 137

Compounds 135, 136 and 137 were prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 125 using intermediate 20 and intermediate 173 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by reverse phase flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 5:95). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford compound 135 (197 mg, 72%) as a pale white solid.

The enantiomers were separated by semi preparative HPLC chromatography (Amylose- 2 column, Heptane/EtOH, gradient from 75:25 to 0: 100). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford compound 136 (35 mg, 21%) and compound 137 (39.1 mg, 24%) as white solids.

El 25.PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 138

Compound 138 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 125 using intermediate 20 and intermediate 171 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, [DCM/MeOH, 9: l]/DCM, gradient from 0: 100 to 100:0). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford compound 138 (46.9 mg, 33%) as a brown oil.

El 26. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 139

Compound 139 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 125 using intermediate 73 and intermediate 133 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM, gradient from 0/100 to 7/93). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford a yellow sticky solid (105 mg). The residue compound 139 (105 mg) was taken into DCM and treated with HC1 (4N in l,4-dioxane, 1 eq). The solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The product was triturated in Et ₂ 0, filtered and dried to afford compound 139 (96 mg, 39%) as a pale orange solid. E127. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 140

Intermediate 21 (174 mg, 0.87 mmol) was added to a stirred mixture of intermediate 150 (148 mg, 0.72 mmol) and K2CO3 (200 mg, 1.45 mmol) in CH3CN (7 mL) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at 75 °C for 16 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in MeOH (47.5 mL) and Amberlyst®A26 hydroxide form (CAS: 39339-85-0; 453 mg, 1.45 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 min. The reaction was filtered and washed with MeOH several times. The filtrate was evaporated in vacuo and the crude product was purified by reverse phase (InterChim Uptisphere Strategy C-18-HQ l00x30mm PREP-LC Column (P/N USC18HQ- 100/30); from 72% [25mM NH4CO3] - 28% [ACN:MeOH (1 :1)] to 36% [25nM NH4CO3] - 64 % [ACN:MeOH (1 :1)]. The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give compound 140 (176 mg, 65%) as a white solid.

El 28. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 141

Compound 141 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 140 using intermediate 152 and intermediate 21 as starting materials.

The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAc, gradient from 100:0 to 80:20). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give compound 141 (110 mg, 73%) as a colorless solid. El 29. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 142

Intermediate 21 (105 mg, 0.53 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 158 (104 mg, 0.44 mmol) and K ₂ CO ₃ (122 mg, 0.88 mmol) in DMF (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 75 °C for 48 h. Additional amount of K ₂ CO ₃ (61 mg, 0.44 mmol) was added at room temperature and the reaction mixture was stirred at 75 °C for another 12 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, heptane/EtOAC, gradient from 100:0 to 20:80). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. A second purification was performed by reverse phase ([25mM NH ₄ HC0 ₃ ]/[CH ₃ CN/Me0H, 1 :1], gradient from 59:41 to 17:83). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford a colorless oil (41 mg).

The residue (41 mg) was dissolved in DCM and treated with HC1 (4N in l,4-dioxane, 1 eq). The solvents were evaporated in vacuo and the product was triturated with DIPE to give compound 142 (33 mg, 17%) as a white solid.

E131. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 150 150

Intermediate 21 (118 mg, 0.59 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 203 (100 mg, 0.49 mmol) and K ₂ CO ₃ (136 mg, 0.98 mmol) in CH3CN (3 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 75 °C for 6 h. The solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by reverse phase ([25mM NH ₄ HC0 ₃ ]/[MeCN:Me0H, 1 :1], gradient from 72:28 to 36:64 ). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to give compound 150 (155 mg, 85%) as a white solid.

El 32. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 151 • HCI 151 Intermediate 21 *HC1 (302 mg, 1.28 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 205 (206 mg, 1.07 mmol) and K2CO3 (442 mg, 3.20 mmol) in CH3CN (8 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 65 °C for 26 h. The solvent was removed and the crude product purified by reverse phase ([25mM NH ₄ HC0 ₃ ]/[ACN:Me0H, 1 :1], gradient from 81 : 19 to 45:55). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford a yellow oil (192 mg).

The residue (192 mg) was taken into DCM and treated with HC1 (4N in dioxane, 1 eq). The solvents were evaporated in vacuo and the product was tritured with Et ₂ 0 to afford compound 151 (170 mg, 40%) as a white solid.

El 33. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 152

Compound 152 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 121 using compound 69 as starting material. The crude product was purified by reverse phase HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 85% NH ₄ HCO ₃ 0.25% solution in water, 15% CH ₃ CN to 55% NH ₄ HCO ₃ 0.25% solution in water, 45% CH ₃ CN), to yield compound 152 (43 mg, 91%) as a colourless oil. El 34. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 153

Compound 153 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 100 using intermediate 145 and 6-chloro-4- methoxynicotinonitrile (CAS: 1187190-69-7) as starting materials. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 10/90). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo to give compound 153 (41.2 mg, 53%) as a colourless oil.

El 35. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 154

Compound 154 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 21 using intermediate 63 and 2,3-dihydro-furo[2,3-b]pyridine carboxaldehyde (CAS: 1557979-76-6) as starting materials. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 10/90). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo to give compound 154 (78.9 mg, 79%) as a colourless oil.

El 36. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 155

Compound 155 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 94 using intermediate 55 and intermediate 20 as starting materials. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 5/95). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo to give 220 mg of compound 155, which was further purified by reverse phase HPLC (stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 50 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from

75% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 25% CH3CN to 40% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 60% CH3CN) yielding compound 155 (91 mg, 26%) as a light yellow solid. El 37. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 156

Compound 156 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 94 using intermediate 121 and intermediate 20 as starting materials. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 5/95). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo to give compound 156 (74.8 mg, 36%) as a pale yellow oil.

E138. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 157

Compound 157 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 94 using intermediate 200 and intermediate 20 as starting materials. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 5/95). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo to give compound 157 (50 mg, 35%) as a pale yellow oil, which was treated with HC1 (2 N in Et ₂ 0) to yield compound 157 . HC1 (78 mg, 50%) as a white solid.

E139. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 158

Method 1 : Compound 158 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 94 using intermediate 95 . TFA (100 mg, 0.41 mmol) and intermediate 20 (88.38 mg, 0.41 mmol) as starting materials. The crude was combined with the batch obtained from method 2 and purified together.

Method 2: Compound 158 was also prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 100 using intermediate 145 (50 mg, 0.177 mmol) and 2-chloro-5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridine (CAS: 52334-81-3, 45.01 mg, 0.248 mmol) as starting materials.

The combined crude batches were purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM /0100 to 10/90). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield compound 158 (117.2 mg, 43%) as a colourless oil.

E140. PREPARATION OP PINAL COMPOUND 159

DIPEA (0.424 mL, 2.46 mmol) was added dropwise to a suspension of intermediate 63 . 2HC1 (150 mg, 0.41 mmol) in CEbCN (2 mL). Then a solution of intermediate 20 (93.61 mg, 0.43 mmol) in CEbCN (1 mL) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred at 80°C for 24h. Then, the solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The residue was taken into EtOAc and sat Na ₂ C0 ₃ was added. The organic layer separated, dried (Na2S0 ₄ ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica; MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 5/95). The desired fractions were collected and solvents evaporated in vacuo to yield a light yellow oil which was purified by reverse phase HPLC (Stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 50 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 70% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 30% CH3CN to 35% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 65% CH3CN), yielding compound 159 (110 mg, 67%) as an oil.

Compound 159 was dissolved in Et ₂ 0 (1.067 mL) and HC1 (2N in Et ₂ 0, 0.478 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred at RT for 1 h. Then, the solid was filtered off and washed with Et ₂ 0. The solid was dried in a dessicator without heating for 2 days to yield compound 159 . 2 HC1 (106 mg, 93%) as a white solid.

E141. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 160

. 2 HC1

K ₂ CO ₃ (143.78 mg, 1.04 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 130 (60 mg, 0.26 mmol) and intermediate 63 (57.30 mg, 0.26 mmol) in CH ₃ CN (1.90 mL) in a sealed tube and under nitrogen. The mixture was stirred for 18h at 60 °C. Then, the reaction was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was separated, dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 10/90). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo to give compound 160 (77 mg, 71%) as a colourless oil.

Compound 160 (77 mg, 0.186 mmol) was dissolved in Et ₂ 0 (0.541 mL) and HC1 (2N in Et ₂ 0, 0.279 mL) was added under stirring. The resulting precipitate was filtered and the compound was immediately dried under vacuum for 24 h at rt to yield compound 160 . 2HC1 (47.8 mg, 53%) as a white solid.

E142. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 161

Compound 161 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 160 using intermediate 20 and intermediate 91 as starting materials. The crude was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 10/90). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield compound 161 (39.8 mg, 41%) as a colourless oil.

El 43. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 162

Compound 162 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 160 using intermediate 20 and intermediate 67 as starting materials. The crude was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 5/95) and then by reverse phase HPLC (Stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 90% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water,

10% CH3CN to 60% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 40% CH3CN), yielding compound 162 (29.2 mg, 15%) as a colourless oil.

E144. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 163

Compound 163 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 119 using compound 67 as starting material. The crude was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 5/95). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. The product was further purified by reverse phase HPLC (Stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 85% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 15% CH3CN to 55% NH4HCO3 0.25% solution in water, 45% CH3CN), yielding compound 163 (48 mg, 57%) as a colourless film. El 45. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 164

Cyclopropylzinc bromide solution (0.5 M in THF, 0.457 mL, 0.228 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 26 (50 mg, 0.114 mmol) and Pd(/-Bu ₃ P)2 (2.9 mg, 0.006 mmol)) in THF (0.43 mL) at room temperature and under a N ₂ atmosphere. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 h. Then additional more cyclopropylzinc bromide solution (0.5 M in THF, 0.457 mL, 0.228 mmol) and Pd(/-Bu ₃ P)2 (0.05 eq) were added and the mixture was stirred at 60 °C for 18 h. Then, the mixture was treated with a mixture of sat. NH ₄ Cl and NH ₄ OH (1 :1) and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was separated, dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica; methanol in DCM 0/100 to 5/95). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo. The product was further purified by RP HPLC (Stationary phase: C18 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 85% NH ₄ HC0 ₃ 0.25% solution in water, 15% CH ₃ CN to 55% NH ₄ HC0 ₃ 0.25% solution in water, 45% CH ₃ CN), to yield compound 164 (25 mg,

55%) as a colourless film.

E146. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 165

DBAD (548.61 mg, 2.38 mmol) was added to a solution of 2-hydroxy-5-methylpyridine (CAS: 1003-68-5, 200 mg, 1.83 mmol), intermediate 145 (532.77 mg, 1.83 mmol) and PPh ₃ (624.92 mg, 2.38 mmol) in toluene (7.99 mL) under N ₂ at 0° C and the reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C for 2 h. Then, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 5/95). The desired fractions were collected and evaporated in vacuo to yield 240 mg of compound 165 as a yellow oil. The compound was purified by reverse phase HPLC (Stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 50 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 75% NH ₄ HCO ₃ 0.25% solution in water, 25% CH ₃ CN to 40% NH ₄ HCO ₃ 0.25% solution in water, 60% CH ₃ CN), yielding compound 165 (76.9 mg, 11%) as a colourless oil.

The compound was treated with 2N HC1 in Et ₂ 0 to yield compound 165 . HC1 (80 mg, 11%) as a white solid. NMR revealed it contained NH4 ⁺ .

Therefore, the sample was suspended in Na ₂ C0 ₃ saturated aq. solution and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was separated, dried, and solvent concentrated in vacuo to give an oil which was dissolved in Et ₂ 0 and treated with 2N HC1 solution in Et ₂ 0 to give compound 165 . HC1 (55.8 mg, 7%) as a white solid.

E147. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 166

Compound 166 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 165 using intermediate 145 and 5,6-dimethylpyridin-3-ol (CAS: 61893-00-3) as starting materials. The crude was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 3/97). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield a white solid, which was purified again by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 3/97). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield compound 166 (35.1 mg, 18%) as a white solid. El 48. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 168

Compound 168 was prepared following an analogous procedure to the one described for the synthesis of compound 70 using intermediate 207 and intermediate 20 as starting materials. The crude was purified by flash column chromatography (silica, MeOH in DCM 0/100 to 10/90). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated in vacuo to yield a mixture of stereoisomers. The mixture was purified by reverse phase HPLC (Stationary phase: Cl 8 XBridge 30 x 100 mm 5 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 67% 0.1% NH4HCO3/NH4OH pH 9 solution in water, 33% CH3CN to 50% 0.1%

NH4HCO3/NH4OH pH 9 solution in water, 50% CH3CN), yielding compound 168 (108 mg, 62%) as a white solid (sticky).

E149. PREPARATION OF FINAL COMPOUND 169

. HC1

Intermediate 205 (103.98 mg, 0.379 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of intermediate 20 (75 mg, 0.345 mmol) and K ₂ CO ₃ (142.89 mg, 0.379 mmol) in CH ₃ CN

(3 mL) at rt. The mixture was stirred at 75°C for 40 h. The mixture was diluted with

NaHC0 ₃ sat. and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS0 ₄ ), filtered and the solvents evaporated in vacuo. The crude was purified by flash column chromatography (silica; EtOAc in heptane, from 0/100 to 0/100). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated to yield a colourless foamy solid, which was purified by reverse phase (Phenomenex Gemini Cl 8 100x30mm 5pm Column; from 59% [25mM NH4HCO3] - 41% [CH ₃ CN:MeOH (1 : 1)] to 17% [25mM NH4HCO3] - 83% [CH3CN:MeOH (1 :1)]). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated to yield compound 169 (110 mg, 69%) as a colourless foamy solid. The product was dissolved in DCM and treated with 1.05 eq of HC1 4 M in dioxane (0.063 mL) The solvents were evaporated in vacuo and the product was triturated with diethyl ether, filtered and dried to yield compound 169 . HC1 (101.9 mg, 60%) as a white foamy solid.

The following compounds were prepared following the methods exemplified in the Experimental Part. In case no salt form is indicated, the compound was obtained as a free base. Έc. No.’ refers to the Example number according to which protocol the compound was synthesized.‘Co. No.’ means compound number.

TABLE 1

The values of salt stoichiometry or acid content in the compounds as provided herein, are those obtained experimentally. The content of hydrochloric acid reported herein was determined by ¹ H NMR integration and/or elemental analysis. ANALYTICAL PART

MELTING POINTS

Values are peak values, and are obtained with experimental uncertainties that are commonly associated with this analytical method.

DSC823e (A): For a number of compounds, melting points were determined with a DSC823e (Mettler-Toledo) apparatus. Melting points were measured with a

temperature gradient of 10 °C/minute. Maximum temperature was 300 °C. Values are peak values (A).

Mettler Toledo MP50 : Melting points were measured with a temperature gradient of 1, 3, 5 or 10 °C/minute. Maximum temperature was 300 °C. The melting point was read from a digital display.

LCMS

GENERAL PROCEDURE

The High Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) measurement was performed using a LC pump, a diode-array (DAD) or a UV detector and a column as specified in the respective methods. If necessary, additional detectors were included (see table of methods below).

Flow from the column was brought to the Mass Spectrometer (MS) which was configured with an atmospheric pressure ion source. It is within the knowledge of the skilled person to set the tune parameters (e.g. scanning range, dwell time...) in order to obtain ions allowing the identification of the compound’s nominal mono isotopic molecular weight (MW) and/or exact mass monoisotopic molecular weight. Data acquisition was performed with appropriate software.

Compounds are described by their experimental retention times (R _t ) and ions. If not specified differently in the table of data, the reported molecular ion corresponds to the [M+H] ⁺ (protonated molecule) and/or [M-H] (deprotonated molecule). For molecules with multiple isotopic patterns (Br, Cl..), the reported value is the one obtained for the lowest isotope mass. All results were obtained with experimental uncertainties that are commonly associated with the method used.

Hereinafter,“SQD” Single Quadrupole Detector,“MSD” Mass Selective Detector, “QTOF” Quadrupole-Time of Flight,“rt” room temperature,“BEH” bridged ethylsiloxane/silica hybrid, HSS” High Strength Silica,“CSH” charged surface hybrid, “UPLC” Ultra Performance Liquid Chromatography,“DAD” Diode Array Detector. TABLE 2. LC-MS Methods (Flow expressed in mL/min; column temperature (T) in °C;

Run time in min).

TABLE 3. Analytical data - LCMS: [M+H] ⁺ means the protonated mass of the free base of the compound, [M-H] means the deprotonated mass of the free base of the compound or the type of adduct specified [M+CFLCOO] ). R _t means retention time (in min). For some compounds, exact mass was determined.

SFCMS-METHODS

GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR SFC-MS METHODS

The SFC measurement was performed using an Analytical Supercritical fluid chromatography (SFC) system composed by a binary pump for delivering carbon dioxide (C0 ₂ ) and modifier, an autosampler, a column oven, a diode array detector equipped with a high-pressure flow cell standing up to 400 bars. If configured with a Mass Spectrometer (MS) the flow from the column was brought to the (MS). It is within the knowledge of the skilled person to set the tune parameters (e.g. scanning range, dwell time...) in order to obtain ions allowing the identification of the compound’s nominal mono isotopic molecular weight (MW). Data acquisition was performed with appropriate software.

TABLE 4. Analytical SFC-MS Methods (Flow expressed in mL/min; column temperature (T) in °C; Run time in minutes, Backpressure (BPR) in bars).

TABLE 5. Analytical SFC data - R _t means retention time (in minutes), [M+H] ⁺ means the protonated mass of the compound, method refers to the method used for (SFC)MS analysis of enantiomerically pure compounds.

NMR

For a number of compounds, ¹ H NMR spectra were recorded on a Bruker DPX-400 spectrometer operating at 400 MHz, on a Bruker Avance I operating at 500MHz, using CHLOROFORM- (deuterated chloroform, CDCb) or DMSO- r, (deuterated DMSO, dimethyl-d6 sulfoxide) as solvent. Chemical shifts (d) are reported in parts per million (ppm) relative to tetramethylsilane (TMS), which was used as internal standard.

TABLE 6. 'H NMR results

PHARMACOLOGICAL EXAMPLES

1) OGA - BIOCHEMICAL ASSAY

The assay is based on the inhibition of the hydrolysis of fluorescein mono-B-D-N- Acetyl-Glucosamine (FM-GlcNAc) (Mariappa et al. 2015, Biochem J 470:255) by the recombinant human Meningioma Expressed Antigen 5 (MGEA5), also referred to as O-GlcNAcase (OGA). The hydrolysis FM-GlcNAc (Marker Gene technologies, cat # Ml 485) results in the formation of B-D-N-glucosamineacetate and fluorescein. The fluorescence of the latter can be measured at excitation wavelength 485 nm and emission wavelength 538nm. An increase in enzyme activity results in an increase in fluorescence signal. Full length OGA enzyme was purchased at OriGene (cat # TP322411). The enzyme was stored in 25 mM Tris.HCl, pH 7.3, 100 mM glycine, 10% glycerol at -20 °C. Thiamet G and GlcNAcStatin were tested as reference compounds (Yuzwa et al. 2008 Nature Chemical Biology 4:483; Yuzwa et al. 2012 Nature

Chemical Biology 8:393). The assay was performed in 200mM Citrate/phosphate buffer supplemented with 0.005% Tween-20. 35.6 g Na ₂ HP0 ₄ 2 H ₂ 0 (Sigma, # C0759) were dissolved in 1 L water to obtain a 200 mM solution. 19.2 g citric acid (Merck, # 1.06580) was dissolved in 1 L water to obtain a 100 mM solution. pH of the sodiumphosphate solution was adjusted with the citric acid solution to 7.2. The buffer to stop the reaction consists of a 500 mM Carbonate buffer, pH 11.0. 734 mg

FM-GlcNAc were dissolved in 5.48 mL DMSO to obtain a 250 mM solution and was stored at -20 °C. OGA was used at a 2nM concentration and FM-GlcNAc at a lOOuM final concentration. Dilutions were prepared in assay buffer.

50 nl of a compound dissolved in DMSO was dispensed on Black Proxiplate TM 384 Plus Assay plates (Perkin Elmer, #6008269) and 3 mΐ fl-OGA enzyme mix added subsequently. Plates were pre-incubated for 60 min at room temperature and then 2 mΐ FM-GlcNAc substrate mix added. Final DMSO concentrations did not exceed 1%.

Plates were briefly centrifuged for 1 min at 1000 rpm and incubate at room temperature for 6 h. To stop the reaction 5 mΐ STOP buffer were added and plates centrifuge again 1 min at lOOOrpm. Fluorescence was quantified in the Thermo Scientific Fluoroskan Ascent or the PerkinElmer EnVision with excitation wavelength 485 nm and emission wavelength 538 nm.

For analysis a best-fit curve is fitted by a minimum sum of squares method. From this an IC50 value and Hill coefficient was obtained. High control (no inhibitor) and low control (saturating concentrations of standard inhibitor) were used to define the minimum and maximum values.

2) OGA - CELLULAR ASSAY

HEK293 cells inducible for P301L mutant human Tau (iso form 2N4R) were established at Janssen. Thiamet-G was used for both plate validation (high control) and as reference compound (reference EC50 assay validation). OGA inhibition is evaluated through the immunocytochemical (ICC) detection of O-GlcNAcylated proteins by the use of a monoclonal antibody (CTD110.6; Cell Signaling, #9875) detecting O- GlcNAcylated residues as previously described (Dorfmueller et al. 2010 Chemistry & biology, 17:1250). Inhibition of OGA will result in an increase of O- GlcNAcylated protein levels resulting in an increased signal in the experiment. Cell nuclei are stained with Hoechst to give a cell culture quality control and a rough estimate of immediate compounds toxicity, if any. ICC pictures are imaged with a Perkin Elmer Opera Phenix plate microscope and quantified with the provided software Perkin Elmer Harmony 4.1.

Cells were propagated in DMEM high Glucose (Sigma, #D5796) following standard procedures. 2 days before the cell assay cells are split, counted and seeded in Poly-D- Lysine (PDL) coated 96-wells (Greiner, #655946) plate at a cell density of 12,000 cells per cm ² (4,000 cells per well) in IOOmI of Assay Medium (Low Glucose medium is used to reduce basal levels of GlcNAcylation) (Park et al. 2014 The Journal of biological chemistry 289: 13519). At the day of compound test medium from assay plates was removed and replenished with 90m1 of fresh Assay Medium. 10m1 of compounds at a lOfold final concentration were added to the wells. Plates were centrifuged shortly before incubation in the cell incubator for 6 hours. DMSO concentration was set to 0.2%. Medium is discarded by applying vacuum. For staining of cells medium was removed and cells washed once with 100 mΐ D-PBS (Sigma, #D8537). From next step onwards unless other stated assay volume was always 50m1 and incubation was performed without agitation and at room temperature. Cells were fixed in 50m1 of a 4% paraformaldehyde (PFA, Alpha aesar, # 043368) PBS solution for 15 minutes at room temperature. The PFA PBS solution was then discarded and cells washed once in lOmM Tris Buffer (LifeTechnologies, # 15567-027), l50mM NaCl (LifeTechnologies, #24740-0110, 0.1% Triton X (Alpha aesar, # A16046), pH 7.5 (ICC buffer) before being permeabilized in same buffer for 10 minutes. Samples are subsequently blocked in ICC containing 5% goat serum (Sigma, #G9023) for 45-60 minutes at room temperature. Samples were then incubated with primary antibody (1/1000 from commercial provider, see above) at 4°C overnight and subsequently washed 3 times for 5 minutes in ICC buffer. Samples were incubated with secondary fluorescent antibody (1/500 dilution, Lifetechnologies, # A-21042) and nuclei stained with Hoechst 33342 at a final concentration of lpg/ml in ICC (Lifetechnologies, # H3570) for 1 hour. Before analysis samples were washed 2 times manually for 5 minutes in ICC base buffer.

Imaging is performed using Perkin Elmer Phenix Opera using a water 20x objective and recording 9 fields per well. Intensity readout at 488nm is used as a measure of O-GlcNAcylation level of total proteins in wells. To assess potential toxicity of compounds nuclei were counted using the Hoechst staining. I Cso- values are calculated using parametric non-linear regression model fitting. As a maximum inhibition Thiamet G at a 200uM concentration is present on each plate. In addition, a concentration response of Thiamet G is calculated on each plate. TABLE 7. Results in the biochemical and cellular assays.

n.d. means not determined. 3) EX VIVO OGA OCCUPANCY ASSAY USING [3 H] -LIGAND

DRUG TREATMENT AND TISSUE PREPARATION

Male NMRI or C57Bl6j mice were treated by oral (p.o.) administration of vehicle or compound. Animals were sacrificed 24 hours after administration. Brains were immediately removed from the skull, hemispheres were separated and the right hemisphere, for ex vivo OGA occupancy assay, was rapidly frozen in dry-ice cooled 2- methylbutane (-40°C). Twenty urn-thick sagittal sections were cut using a Leica CM 3050 cryostat-microtome (Leica, Belgium), thaw-mounted on microscope slides (SuperFrost Plus Slides, Thermo Fisher Scientific) and stored at -20°C until use. After thawing, sections were dried under a cold stream of air. The sections were not washed prior to incubation. The 10 minutes incubation with 3 nM [ ³ H]-ligand was rigorously controlled. All brain sections (from compound-treated and vehicle-treated animals) were incubated in parallel. After incubation, the excess of [ ³ H]-ligand was washed off in ice-cold buffer (PBS IX and 1% BSA) 2 times 10 minutes, followed by a quick dip in distilled water. The sections were then dried under a stream of cold air.

QUANTITATIVE AUTORADIOGRAPHY AND DATA ANALYSIS

Radioactivity in the forebrain area of brain slices was measured using a b-imager with M3 vision analysis software (Biospace Lab, Paris). Specific binding was calculated as the difference between total binding and non-specific binding measured in Thiamet-G (10 mM) treated sections. Specific binding in sections from drug treated animals was normalised to binding in sections from vehicle treated mice to calculate percentage of OGA occupancy by the drug.